JP6958702B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

There is a gaming machine having a closing means for opening and closing the inlet Prize port (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-220731

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of attracting the attention of the player.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be improved in terms of attracting the attention of the player.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a launching device for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area, a passing means configured to allow the gaming ball to pass through, and the passing means through which the gaming ball passes. A gaming machine including an open / close displacement means that displaces the passing means from a closed state that makes it impossible to pass to an open state that allows the game ball to pass, and a drive means that drives the open / close displacement means. A driven means that is driven in response to the displacement of the open / close displacement means is provided, and the driven means is configured so that the state change can be easily identified as compared with the open / close displacement means, and the driven means is driven. The means is configured to change the flow path of the gaming ball according to the state change, and when the gaming machine is changed from the closed state to the open state, the opening / closing displacement means is started to be displaced, and then the subject is covered. the change of state of the drive means Ru is configured to start.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 includes a board box in the gaming machine according to claim 1.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it can be improved in terms of drawing attention to the player.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, the substrate can be housed in the substrate box.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view disassembled perspective view of a game board and a board lower part unit. It is a front view disassembled perspective view of a game board and a board lower part unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a game board and a board lower part unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the variable winning device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is a top view of the variable winning device, (b) is a front view of the variable winning device, and (c) is a side view of the variable winning device in the direction of arrow Xc of FIG. 10 (b). be. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize-winning device in line XIa-XIa of FIG. 10 (b), and FIG. It is a cross-sectional view. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the game board. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lower board unit in line XIIIa-XIIIa of FIG. 12 (b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower board unit in line XIIIb-XIIIb of FIG. 12 (b). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the lower board unit in which the arrangement of the light irradiation unit is virtually changed from FIG. 13 (b). (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the correspondence between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter and the hit in the ordinary symbol. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the game board and the board lower part unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view disassembled perspective view of a game board and a board lower part unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a game board and a board lower part unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the variable winning device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is a top view of the variable winning device, (b) is a front view of the variable winning device, and (c) is a side view of the variable winning device in the direction of arrow XXc of FIG. 20 (b). be. It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in line XXI-XXI of FIG. 20 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in line XXa-XXa of FIG. 20 (b), and FIG. 20 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in line XXb-XXb of FIG. 20 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in line XXa-XXa of FIG. 20 (b), and FIG. 20 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in line XXb-XXb of FIG. 20 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in line XXa-XXa of FIG. 20 (b), and FIG. 20 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in line XXb-XXb of FIG. 20 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in line XXa-XXa of FIG. 20 (b), and FIG. 20 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in line XXb-XXb of FIG. 20 (b). FIGS. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing timekeeping changes in the positions and states of the moving upper lid member, the solenoid, and the movable effect member. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the game board. (A) and (b) are partial front perspective views of the game board. It is a partial front perspective view of the game board in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view of the movable effect member in a tilted state, (b) is a side view of the movable effect member in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 30 (a), and FIG. 30 (c) is a side view of the movable effect member. (A) is a top view of the movable effect member in the direction of arrow XXXc, and (d) is a side view of the movable effect member in an upright state in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 30 (a). (A) to (c) are top surface schematic views schematically showing a movable effect member, a distribution part, an extended floor part, and a guide inclined surface. It is a figure which showed the clock change of the output of the moving upper lid member, the solenoid, the movable effect member, the sensor, the second sensor, the regulation valve and the V winning sensor in the 1st operation pattern. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the big hit type in the special symbol. It is a front perspective view in the line of sight looking up from the lower side of the variable winning apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view in the line of sight looking up from below of the moving upper lid member. (A) is a front view of the moving upper lid member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the moving upper lid member in the line XXXVIb-XXXVIb of FIG. 36 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the variable winning apparatus in the line corresponding to the XXI-XXI line of FIG. 20 (b). It is a rear perspective view of the switching device. (A) to (c) are side surfaces of the switching device, the first transmission member, the second transmission member, and the movable effect member which schematically show the operation of the switching device, the first transmission member, the second transmission member, and the movable effect member. It is a schematic diagram. (A) to (c) are side surfaces of the switching device, the first transmission member, the second transmission member, and the movable effect member which schematically show the operation of the switching device, the first transmission member, the second transmission member, and the movable effect member. It is a schematic diagram. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the position and state of a moving upper lid member, a solenoid, and a movable effect member. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the output of a moving upper lid member, a solenoid, a movable effect member, a sensor, and a 2nd sensor in a 2nd operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the output of a moving upper lid member, a movable effect member, a sensor, and a 2nd sensor in another example 1 of the 2nd operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the output of a moving upper lid member, a movable effect member, a sensor, and a 2nd sensor in another example 2 of the 2nd operation pattern. It is a front view of a game board. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of ROM in a main control device. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first random number table. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the 1st type selection table. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table. It is a rear perspective view of the switching device in 5th Embodiment. (A) to (c) are side surfaces of the switching device, the first transmission member, the second transmission member, and the movable effect member which schematically show the operation of the switching device, the first transmission member, the second transmission member, and the movable effect member. It is a schematic diagram. (A) to (c) are side surfaces of the switching device, the first transmission member, the second transmission member, and the movable effect member which schematically show the operation of the switching device, the first transmission member, the second transmission member, and the movable effect member. It is a schematic diagram. It is a figure which showed the clock change of the moving upper lid member, the solenoid, and the movable effect member in the 3rd operation pattern. It is a front view disassembled perspective view of the board lower part unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a rear view disassembled perspective view of the board lower part unit. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a movable effect member and a load generator. (A) is a left side view of the first clutch member, and (b) is a top view of the first clutch member in the direction of arrow LVIIIb of FIG. 58 (a). (A) is a right side view of the second clutch member, and (b) is a top view of the second clutch member in the direction of arrow LIXb of FIG. 59 (a). (A) to (c) are right side views of the movable effect member and the second clutch member showing the operation of the movable effect member and the second clutch member in chronological order, and (d) to (f) are respectively. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the posture of the 1st clutch member and the 2nd clutch member shown in FIGS. 60A to 60C. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the first clutch member and the second clutch member in the direction of arrow LXIa of FIG. 60 (b), and (c) is the direction of arrow LXIc of FIG. 60 (c). It is a front perspective view of the 1st clutch member and the 2nd clutch member in view. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the moving upper lid member, the solenoid, the movable effect member, and the 2nd clutch member in the 4th operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the clock change of the moving upper lid member, the solenoid, the movable effect member, and the 2nd clutch member in the 5th operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the output of a moving upper lid member, a solenoid, a movable effect member, a 2nd clutch member, and a sensor in the 6th operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the output of a moving upper lid member, a solenoid, a movable effect member, a 2nd clutch member, and a sensor in a 7th operation pattern. It is a figure which showed the clock change of the moving upper lid member, the solenoid, the movable effect member, and the 2nd clutch member in the 8th operation pattern. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the big hit type in the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type and the state of the movable effect member in a round game. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the output of a moving upper lid member, a solenoid, a movable effect member, a 2nd clutch member, a sensor and a 3rd sensor in a 9th operation pattern (non-V). It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the output of a moving upper lid member, a solenoid, a movable effect member, a 2nd clutch member, a sensor and a 3rd sensor in the 9th operation pattern (V). It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the output of a moving upper lid member, a solenoid, a movable effect member, a 2nd clutch member, a sensor and a 3rd sensor in another example of 9th operation pattern (V). It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the output of a moving upper lid member, a solenoid, a movable effect member, a 2nd clutch member, a sensor and a 3rd sensor in a tenth operation pattern (passing underneath). It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the output of a moving upper lid member, a solenoid, a movable effect member, a 2nd clutch member, a sensor, and a 3rd sensor in a tenth operation pattern (upper passage).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 14, one embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 as a first embodiment will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1 will be described with the front side of the paper surface as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper surface as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails (not shown), winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (also referred to as a game ball or a pachinko ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a ball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. NS.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the area around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, board surface lower unit 300 having variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 6), through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. The peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63 and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like. The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable winning device 330 are integrally formed with the board surface lower unit 300 fitted into the receiving opening 60a of the base plate 60, which will be described later.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In this pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn by taking the opportunity of winning a prize in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and when the ball passes through the through gate 67, a lottery is performed. A lottery for ordinary symbols (second symbol) is held. In the lottery of special symbols performed for the balls entering the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is also determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In that case, the jackpot type is also determined.

In the pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as the probability variation state of the special symbol), 60 minutes. It is judged as a big hit of a special symbol with a probability of 1. For convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is referred to as the "lottery of the special symbol 1", and the special lottery performed for the ball entering the second winning opening 640 is referred to. The lottery of symbols is called "lottery of special symbols 2".

When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) The released operation is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. In the present embodiment, it is controlled so that 15 prize balls are paid out by inserting one game ball into the specific prize opening 65a.

There are six types of special symbols, "Big hit A", "Big hit B", "Big hit C", "Big hit a", "Big hit b", and "Big hit c" (FIG. 14). reference). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 65a is controlled to be different depending on the jackpot type.

When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts variable display of the special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the maximum number of times the ball is entered is 4 for each type of winning opening. It is held up to a number of times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81.

When the variable display is completed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first winning opening 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1) or the number of reserved balls for the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2). If the number of reserved balls) remains, the next special symbol lottery will be held and the variable display according to the lottery will start. If both the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

In the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is a hit. When the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened for a predetermined time, and the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball easily enters the second winning opening 640, and as a result, the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 4), and the lottery result is shown after a predetermined time has elapsed. The symbol is stopped and displayed. If a sphere passes through the through gate 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. At the same time, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84 (see FIG. 4). When the variation display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variation display according to the lottery is started. NS.

In the present embodiment, as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given from the end of the special game state to the end of the lottery of the special symbol 100 times, and the lottery of the special symbol is performed. After 100 times, it is configured to be set to the normal state.

In the present embodiment, when the probabilistic state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special gaming state, the probabilistic state of the special symbol is configured to end according to the number of lottery of the special symbol. The pachinko machine 10 is not limited to, for example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a described later), from the end of the jackpot to the next jackpot. May shift to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol). In this case, even if it is configured so that after the jackpot game of another jackpot type (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, jackpot c described later), the normal symbol time is shortened until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times. good.

The number of lottery of the special symbol to which the above-mentioned probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times, which is less than 100 times, or 200 times, which is more than 100 times.

Further, the number of lottery times for the special symbols described above in which the time is shortened is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 5 times.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" refers to the state in which the probability of the subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, to the special gaming state. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift. The high-probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the probability of the special symbol is not changing, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of the jackpot is lower than that during the probability change of the special symbol.

In addition, the time saving state of the normal symbol (during the time saving) means a state of the game in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased and the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640.

Further, the normal state refers to a state of the game in which neither the probability of the special symbol is changed nor the time is shortened of the normal symbol (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) are not increased).

During the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, not only the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed to the normal state. A longer time is set in comparison. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. That is, a lottery for special symbols is likely to be performed.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when the normal symbol is hit may be increased as compared with the normal state.

In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) does not change during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened, and the electric motor. At least one of the number of times the accessory 640a is opened may be changed.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed, and the normal symbol (No. 1) It may be configured so that only the hit probability of 2 symbols) is increased as compared with the normal state.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probabilistic jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while synchronizing with the variable display of the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 4) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols having numbers from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned. It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit b", "big hit c", even numbers "0,2,4,6,8" are added. A variable display is performed in which the main symbols are aligned. On the other hand, if it is "big hit A" or "big hit a", it is one of all the numbers "0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9" including odd numbers. A variable display is performed in which the main symbols with the addition of are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned.

Next, a display (striking method navigation) that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and prompts the player to launch the ball aiming at the path (flow path) on the right or left side of the game board 13 will be described.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol is in a probabilistic state or the normal symbol is in a time-saving state, the electric accessory 640a is easily released, so that the ball is moved to the right side of the game board 13. By launching (striking to the right), it becomes easier for the ball to stably enter the second winning opening 640. Further, as will be described in detail later, if a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the first winning opening 64 will be reached. Compared to the case where a big hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery (lottery for special symbol 1) performed based on the ball entering, the jackpot (big hit a) that can obtain the maximum profit is likely to be obtained.

Therefore, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol given after the end of the big hit and the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is advantageous for the player to execute the right-handed hit. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the probabilistic state or the normal symbol is set to the time saving state, the ball cannot be stably entered into the second winning opening 640 unless the player hits right. Therefore, the player may not be able to fully receive the benefits of the probabilistic state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, by displaying a specific image (right-handed navigation), the player can perform the probabilistic state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol. It is structured so that the benefits of becoming can be surely obtained.

In the right-handed navigation system, the character "Aim to the right !!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the character. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13.

In addition, when it is advantageous for the player to play the jackpot game by left-handed, in the present embodiment, by displaying a specific image (left-handed navigation), the player mistakenly hits right-handed. It is configured to prevent the game from being played and to make it easier for the player to obtain the benefits obtained by hitting the left side.

In the left-handed navigation system, the character "Aim to the left !!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three left-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the character. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the left side of the game board 13.

The second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 4) displays a symbol “○” and a symbol “×” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67. It is a variable display that lights up alternately for a predetermined time. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning result, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be in operation (open) for a period of time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 4), and if the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery is performed. If the result of is different, the symbol of "x" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of reserved balls that have passed through the through gate 67 of the balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84 (see FIG. 4). Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 4) as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device. It may be performed by using a part of 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp 84 (see FIG. 4).

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. ”Is easy to display, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a as provided in the second winning opening 640, and the game ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a jackpot with the maximum profit (for example, throwing out) as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. It is set higher than when the ball wins 64.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. A ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning a prize in the first winning opening 64, a lot of chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and a big hit is made. It is advantageous for the player to aim to become.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit a by winning a prize in the second winning opening 640.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a symmetrical configuration of the game board 13, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 6) is arranged below the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done. The details of the variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 6) that opens and closes the specific winning opening 65a will be described later, but briefly, the moving upper lid member 332 of the variable winning device 330 slides to move the specific winning opening 65a. It is opened and closed (the open state in which the game ball flowing down the upstream of the moving upper lid member 332 reaches the front side of the specific winning opening 65a and then can pass through the specific winning opening 65a, and the other closed state is switched. Will be).

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp or an identification label is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 314. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 314. The out openings 314 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged (not shown).

In the present embodiment, about 10% of the game balls launched in the normal state go to the general winning opening 63, and about 10% flow down on the road nail (not shown) and enter the first winning opening 64. After the remaining 80% flows down on the road nail, it leaks from the first winning opening 64, rolls on the moving upper lid member 332 described later, and passes through the out opening 314. That is, when the game balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the game balls reach the moving upper lid member 332 at intervals of about 0.75 seconds. In this case, since it is possible to always maintain one or more game balls on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332, even if the opening time of the moving upper lid member 332 is short, the game balls can be designated as the winning opening 65a. Can be made to flow down toward.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a moving upper lid member 332 that opens and closes a specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid (solenoid 2333) for driving the motor and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. do.

The specific winning opening 65a may be opened / closed by driving the opening / closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

Sensors for detecting a game ball, such as the sensor S, the second sensor S2, the third sensor S3, and the V winning sensor VC, which will be described later, are included in the various switches 208.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor 510 and the like, which will be described later.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the board surface lower unit 300 arranged in the lower part of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 13. 5 and 6 are front exploded perspective views of the game board 13 and the lower board unit 300, and FIG. 7 is a rear exploded perspective view of the game board 13 and the lower board unit 300. Note that FIG. 5 shows a state in which only the front plate member 320 is disassembled from the game board 13, and in FIGS. 6 and 7, the front unit 310 and the variable winning device 330 of the board surface lower unit 300 are further played from FIG. The state of being disassembled from the board 13 is shown. Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the game board 13 is shown in a simplified manner.

As shown in FIG. 5, a specific winning opening 65a is formed along the lower edge of the inner rail 61. Since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed from a downwardly convex curved shape, the arrangement position of the specific winning opening 65a is set as compared with the case where the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed by a straight line along the left-right direction. Can be lowered downwards. The outer edge of the specific winning opening 65a has an upper side formed of a moving upper lid member 332 (see FIG. 6), a lower side formed of a lower edge of the inner rail 61, and left and right sides of the left and right walls of the opening upper portion 313. Formed in parts.

As will be described later, the specific winning opening 65a is switched between the closed state and the open state described above by sliding the moving upper lid member 332 back and forth, and the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is, for example, 15 at the maximum. It can be repeated once (15 rounds).

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the board surface lower unit 300 is a unit constituting the out port 314 from which the ball is discharged and the specific winning opening 65a, and is bored in the lower part of the game board 13 in the front-rear direction. A front unit 310 that is fitted into the receiving opening 60a from the front side and fastened and fixed, and a front plate member 320 that is fastened and fixed to the front unit 310 from the front side and a ball path is formed on the back side. It mainly includes a variable winning device 330 including a moving upper lid member 332 that is fitted into the opening 60a from the back surface side, fastened and fixed, and changes the flow direction of the ball.

The front unit 310 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 311 formed so that a ball can flow down on the front side, and an electric accessory 640a in which a pair of members are opened and closed left and right at the center of the front side of the main body plate portion 311. , A plate-shaped inclined plate portion 312 projecting to the front side at the upper left and right sides of the main body plate portion 311 and an opening upper portion 313 recessed upward from the lower bottom portion of the main body plate portion 311 and an opening upper side thereof. A pair of out ports 314, which are bored in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides of the portion 313 and the balls are discharged out of the game area, are mainly provided.

The main body plate portion 311 is bored in the front-rear direction at a position surrounded by a pair of members of the first winning opening lower side 311a formed above the electric accessory 640a and forming the lower side of the first winning opening 64 and the electric accessory 640a. The second winning opening 640 to be provided, the light irradiation device 311b arranged below the second winning opening 640 and illuminating the front side of the second winning opening 640, and the rib-shaped front side on the outside of the out opening 314. It is mainly provided with a ball flow rib 311c that is convexly provided.

The light irradiation device 311b is accommodated in the accommodating recess 323a (see FIG. 7) of the front plate member 320, and is directed upward (on the second winning opening 640 side) due to the ball winning in the second winning opening 640. It is an LED member that is irradiated with light.

The control of the light emission timing of the light irradiation device 311b can be arbitrarily set. For example, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state and it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640, the light irradiation that is normally turned off for the purpose of making the player notice the change in the state. Control may be performed such as causing the device 311b to emit light or turning off the light irradiation device 311b that is normally lit.

The ball sink rib 311c adjusts the flow direction of the ball rolling along the inner rail 61, and the details will be described later in FIG.

The inclined plate portion 312 is formed so that a sphere can roll on the upper side surface, is arranged above the left and right of the electric accessory 640a, and is inclined downward so as to be closer to the electric accessory 640a. As a result, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state where it falls to the left or right, the ball that rolls down the inclined plate portion 312 can be made to win the second winning opening 640 with high probability. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state in which it stands up, the ball that rolls on the inclined plate portion 312 and flows down can be dropped to the front side of the opening upper portion 313 with high probability.

The upper side portion 313 of the opening is formed so as to be inclined upward toward the center of the left and right sides. Here, by setting the vertical width of the central portion in the left-right direction of the specific winning opening 65a to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, the vertical width of the left and right wall portions of the opening upper portion 313 (corresponding to the left and right wall portions of the specific winning opening 65a). ) Can be set to a length equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere (see FIG. 12). In this case, it is difficult to win the ball from the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a, but the ball is flowed down to the central portion of the game board 13 along the inner rail 61, and the central portion in the left-right direction of the specific winning opening 65a. Since it is possible to win a prize from, the game can be continued.

Here, when the upper and lower side surfaces of the specific winning opening 65a are parallel surfaces (planes extending in the left-right direction), until the straight line intersecting with the inner rail 61 becomes the same as the length of the lower side surface of the specific winning opening 65a. It is necessary to raise the specific winning opening 65a from the lower edge of the inner rail 61 and arrange it. Therefore, the position of the specific winning opening 65a becomes high.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lower side surface of the specific winning opening 65a is curved like the lower side surface of the inner rail 61, it is not necessary to raise the specific winning opening 65a and the specific winning opening 65a is placed in a low position. Can be placed in.

Further, since the upper side surface of the specific winning opening 65a is inclined downward as it approaches the left and right ends, the ball to the specific winning opening 65a is compared with the case where the upper side surface is formed by a plane extending in the left-right direction. The placement of the road nails that guide the vehicle can be lowered. As a result, the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered.

The out openings 314 are formed in pairs on the left and right sides of the opening upper portion 313, and the lower side of the out opening 314 is arranged below and the upper side of the out opening 314 is arranged above the left and right ends of the opening upper portion 313. NS. That is, the opening upper portion 313 is formed below the out opening 314. As a result, the arrangement of the variable winning device 330, which will be described later, can be lowered, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered. Even with such an arrangement, in the present embodiment, the sphere is flowed down on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 which has an upper side surface having substantially the same shape as the shape of the opening upper portion 313 and is slid in the front-rear direction. Is discharged to the out port 314 (see FIG. 12), so that the game can be continued.

The front plate member 320 is a plate-shaped member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and is arranged on the front side of the front unit 310 and is formed so that a sphere can flow down between the front plate member 320 and the main body plate portion 311. 321 The electric accessory lower support portion 323 is provided, the out opening lower plate 324 arranged along the lower side surface of the out opening 314, and the main body plate portion 321 projecting from the main body plate portion 321 along the lower edge of the inner rail 61. It mainly includes a ball feed unit 325.

The main body plate portion 321 includes a ball sink rib 321a that is convexly provided on the back surface side in a rib shape on the outside of the out port lower plate 324. The ball flow rib 321a adjusts the flow direction of the ball rolling along the inner rail 61, and the details thereof will be described later in FIG.

The electric accessory lower support portion 323 includes a storage recess 323a which is a horizontally long recess, and the light irradiation device 311b is housed in the storage recess 323a.

The out port lower plate 324 is provided with thin ribs extending in the front-rear direction on the upper side surface in a row in the left-right direction. Further, the out port lower plate 324 includes a step portion 324a projecting upward at the left and right inner end portions. The unevenness formed on the upper side surface of the out port lower plate 324 can decelerate the flowing ball. Further, the ribs formed on the outer opening lower plate 324 are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back surface side. As a result, the speed at which the flowing ball is discharged to the out port 314 can be improved.

Since the inclined plate portion 312 described above is formed directly above the out opening lower plate 324 (see FIG. 12), a ball that falls after rolling the inclined plate portion 312 is directed toward the out opening lower plate 324. It is suppressed from falling. That is, the ball that falls after rolling the inclined plate portion 312 falls inside the pair of out-port lower plates 324 in the left-right direction (position where the moving upper lid member 332 is arranged), or the out-port lower plate 324. It either falls to the outer end portion (near the ball sink rib 321a and at the boundary position between the rib formation range and the rail through which the ball flows). Both of these are outside the rib formation range. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling onto the out-mouth lower plate 324 from a high place, and it is possible to improve the durability of the out-mouth lower plate 324.

The step portion 324a is a step formed between the out opening 314 and the specific winning opening 65a, and the ball flowing down from the left-right direction and flowing down the upper side surface of the out opening lower plate 324 exceeds the step portion 324a. It is prevented from flowing down to the central portion in the left-right direction (see FIG. 12). That is, the ball that flows down from the left-right direction and flows down the upper side surface of the out port lower plate 324 is exclusively guided to the out port 314.

The ball feeding portion 325 mainly includes a back side side surface 325a formed on the back side and left and right side side surfaces 325b connected to the back side side surface 325a and formed on the left and right sides.

The rear side surface 325a is inclined downward toward the back side, and the left and right side surfaces 325b are inclined toward the center toward the back side. As a result, the flow direction of the ball that has reached the ball feed portion 325 can be directed to the back side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball from staying in front of the specific winning opening 65a and suppress the so-called over winning.

Next, the variable winning device 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10. 8 is a front exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 330, FIG. 9 is a rear exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 330, and FIG. 10A is a top view of the variable winning device 330. 10 (b) is a front view of the variable winning device 330, and FIG. 10 (c) is a side view of the variable winning device 330 in the direction of arrow Xc of FIG. 10 (b).

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the variable winning device 330 includes a main body member 331 forming a skeleton and a movable upper lid member 332 which is inserted into the main body member 331 from the front and is formed so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. A solenoid 333 that generates a driving force for sliding the moving upper lid member 332 and a lever member 334b that is swung by the solenoid 333 are housed and a rear lid member 334 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 331. And mainly prepare.

The main body member 331 is arranged below the deformed through hole 331a through which the moving upper lid member 332 is inserted, the lower passage 331b through which the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows down, and the lower passage 331b, and is directed upward. It mainly includes a light irradiating device 331c that irradiates light, and a rear side accommodating portion 331d that is a recess formed on the rear side toward the front side and accommodates a solenoid 333, a lever member 334b, and the like. ..

As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the deformed through hole 331a is a through hole formed along the shape of the moving upper lid member 332, and is a front portion accommodating the front side plate portion 332a. It mainly includes an opening 331a1 and a rear opening 331a2 for accommodating the rear plate portion 332b.

The front opening 331a1 is a recess formed in a pentagonal shape in which the lower side is horizontally extended in front view, the upper side is ascended and inclined toward the center, and the left and right side sides are extended vertically.

The rear opening 331a2 is an opening formed by cutting off the left and right portions of the front opening 331a1 from the back central portion of the front opening 331a1. That is, the outer shapes of the lower and upper sides of the rear opening 331a2 and the outer shapes of the lower and upper sides of the front opening 331a1 do not form steps in the front-rear direction, but are formed at surface positions. As a result, the moving upper lid member 332 can be smoothly guided.

The lower passage 331b is a passage formed in pairs on the left and right so that the sphere can pass through (see FIG. 13A), and is formed so as to project downward from the lower edge of the inner rail 61, and the sphere is formed behind the lower passage 331b. A sensor S for detecting the passage of the sensor S is arranged (see FIG. 10B).

The light irradiation device 331c is a device that illuminates the lower passage 331b, the plate-shaped portion 332a1, and the like with light to produce an effect, and is arranged below the inner rail 61 (lower part of the receiving opening 60a). As a result, the devices required for the light irradiation device 331c can be arranged below the inner rail 61, so that a space on the back side of the game board 13 can be secured, and the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. FIG. The lower edge (see 2) can be lowered downward.

The light irradiation device 331c includes a light irradiation unit 331c1 that irradiates light. The light irradiation unit 331c1 is formed in pairs on the left and right directly below the lower passage 331b, and irradiates light upward.

The rear side accommodating portion 331d communicates with the front opening 331a1 with the rear opening 331a2 interposed therebetween.

The moving upper lid member 332 is a long member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a front side plate portion 332a housed in the front opening portion 331a1 and a rear side plate portion 332b housed in the rear opening portion 331a2. A central rib 332c projecting downward along the central axis of the front plate portion 332a and the rear plate portion 332b, and a connecting hole 332d bored in the rear end of the rear plate portion 332b in the vertical direction. Mainly prepare.

The moving upper lid member 332 may be formed of a non-permeable resin material. In this case, the player who visually recognizes the specific winning opening 65a from above the moving upper lid member 332 can easily see the flow of the game ball to the specific winning opening 65a in the state of the moving upper lid member 332 (open state or closed state). It can be changed greatly depending on the state). In other words, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the open state (retracted state), it flows down to the downstream of the moving upper lid member 332 as compared with the case where the moving upper lid member 332 is in the closed state (overhanging state). It is possible to improve the visibility of the game ball to be played.

The front side plate portion 332a is formed in a plate-shaped portion 332a1 formed in a manner of ascending and tilting toward the central portion in the left-right direction along the shape of the upper side of the front opening portion 331a1, and is formed in the vertical direction of the plate-shaped portion 332a1. A lightening hole 332a2 and a guide rib 332a3 extending downward and extending in the front-rear direction at the left-right end of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 are mainly provided.

The plate-shaped portion 332a1 includes a front inclined side surface 332a1f which is formed so as to be inclined toward the back side toward the lower side (see FIG. 11) and is formed so as to be recessed toward the back side toward the central portion in the left-right direction. Since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be recessed toward the back side toward the central portion in the left-right direction, the ball can flow toward the center side when the ball is sandwiched between the front plate member 320 and the front inclined side surface 332a1f. , It is possible to prevent the ball from interfering with the sliding operation of the moving upper lid member 332.

Since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed as a portion that reflects light as described later, in order to effectively reflect the light, a metal film may be formed on the front inclined side surface 332a1f or mirror-finished. You may. In this embodiment, a tape that reflects light is attached.

The guide ribs 332a3 are formed along the left and right side surfaces of the front opening 331a1 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10), and slide with the lower side surface of the front opening 331a1. As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the moving upper lid member 332 in the left-right direction when the moving upper lid member 332 is slid.

The central rib 332c is formed at the bent portion of the front side plate portion 332a formed by bending the plate shape. Thereby, the rigidity of the front plate portion 332a can be improved. Further, when the moving upper lid member 332 is slid forward (when the moving upper lid member 332 of the variable winning device 330 is in the overhanging state), it is fastened to the back side of the opening upper portion 313 (FIG. 11 (b). )reference). As a result, it is possible to prevent the central rib 332c and the ball from colliding with each other and causing the moving upper lid member 332 to malfunction.

The connecting hole 332d is a through hole through which the connecting portion 334b4 of the lever member 334b is inserted and the displacement due to the swing of the lever member 334b is transmitted to the moving upper lid member 332 (see FIG. 11).

The solenoid 333 mainly includes a main body portion 333a as a drive source, and a hook-shaped hook-shaped member 333b which is arranged below the main body portion 333a and is moved up and down below the lever member 334b.

The rear lid member 334 mainly includes a plate-shaped main body portion 334a and a lever member 334b which is pivotally supported by the main body portion 334a and whose tip is formed so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.

The lever member 334b includes a main body portion 334b1 extending in the vertical direction, a pair of shaft portions 334b2 projecting in a columnar shape in both left and right directions at the lower end portion of the main body portion 334b1 and pivotally supported by the main body portion 334a. At a lower claw portion 334b3 that extends below the main body portion 334b1 at a substantially intermediate position of the pair of shaft portions 334b2 and is formed so as to accommodate a hook-shaped member 333b between the main body portion 334b1 and the upper end portion of the main body portion 334b1. It mainly includes a connecting portion 334b4 that is formed to bulge into a columnar shape.

Next, the sliding movement of the moving upper lid member 332 will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 330 in line XIa-XIa of FIG. 10 (b), and FIG. 11 (b) is a slide movement of the moving upper lid member 332 from the state of FIG. 11 (a). It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus 330 after making it. In addition, FIG. 11A shows a retracted state in which the moving upper lid member 332 is arranged rearward, and FIG. 11B shows an overhanging state in which the moving upper lid member 332 is arranged forward, and light. In order to facilitate understanding of the path E1 of the central rib 332c, the illustration of the central rib 332c is partially omitted. Further, in FIGS. 11A and 11B, the inner rail 61 and the front plate member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2) are virtually illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 11A, when the moving upper lid member 332 forms the retracted state, the hook-shaped member 333b is arranged upward and the lever member 334b is tilted backward. In this state, the ball can flow down in front of the variable winning device 330, that is, the ball can win a prize (open state) in the specific winning opening 65a (see FIGS. 5 and 12).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11B, when the moving upper lid member 332 forms an overhanging state, the hook-shaped member 333b is pressed downward so that the lever member 334b is tilted forward about the shaft portion 334b2 and the back surface. The moving upper lid member 332 is slid and moved to the front side while being abutted against the side surface of the side accommodating portion 331d. In this state, the ball cannot win a prize (closed state) in the specific winning opening 65a (see FIGS. 5 and 12).

In this case, the rear side surface of the lower end portion of the hook-shaped member 333b is brought into contact with the end portion of the lower claw portion 334b3 of the lever member 334b in the front-rear direction, so that the swing of the lever member 334b is mechanically regulated. (The hook-shaped member 333b is arranged in the moving direction of the lower claw portion 334b3, and the moving direction of the lower claw portion 334b3 and the moving direction of the hook-shaped member 333b are orthogonal to each other). Therefore, the driving force of the solenoid 333 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the swing of the lever member 334b is stopped by the driving force of the solenoid 333.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11, the path of the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 331c will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11A, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state, the light emitted upward from the light irradiating portion 331c1 reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 along the path E1. do. At this time, since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be inclined toward the back side toward the lower side, the light irradiated from below and reaching the front side inclined side surface 332a1f is reflected toward the front (player side). In this case, the player can visually recognize the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the moving upper lid member 332 as if it is emitting light. Further, since the light reflected by the front inclined side surface 332a1f is projected into the light projection range E0 of the front plate member 320, the front plate member 320 can be attracted attention. Thereby, the directing ability of the moving upper lid member 332 and the front plate member 320 can be improved.

Here, when an LED or the like is arranged on the moving upper lid member 332 to cause the moving upper lid member 332 to emit light, the moving upper lid member 332 may become large. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the LED is not arranged on the moving upper lid member 332, the ability of the moving upper lid member 332 as an effect portion is improved while suppressing the increase in size of the moving upper lid member 332. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 11B, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the overhanging state, the light emitted upward from the light irradiation unit 331c1 along the path E2 and directed to the front inclined side surface 332a1f is the inner rail 61. It does not reach the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 because it is shielded by. In this case, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 along the path E1 reaches the intermediate position of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 of the front side plate portion 332a and only transmits as it is, so that the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320 Is darkly visible to the player.

That is, depending on whether the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state or the overhanging state, whether or not the light emitted from the light irradiating portion 331c1 reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f changes, and the front plate Whether or not the light projection range E0 of the member 320 is brightly visible changes. Therefore, by checking the brightness state of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the light projection range E0 of the front plate member 320, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball can be won in the specific winning opening 65a.

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, since the moving upper lid member 332 slides back and forth, it is difficult to grasp the change in the state of the moving upper lid member 332 from the front view (FIGS. 12A and 12B). ), It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a ball can be won in the specific winning opening 65a by changing the brightness of the light projection range E0.

Here, the moving upper lid member 332 has an operation necessary for forming a closed state that prevents the ball from passing through the specific winning opening 65a and an open state that allows the ball to pass through the specific winning opening 65a ( The state of the brightness of the light projection range E0 is changed only by the front-back slide movement). In other words, since the state of the light projection range E0 is changed only by the operation required for the moving upper lid member 332 to continue the game, no additional mechanism is required. That is, the moving upper lid member 332 can be used for both the purpose of switching whether or not the ball can pass through the specific winning opening 65a and the purpose of producing an effect by the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1.

By crossing the path E1 when the sphere passes through the lower passage 331b, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c may be reflected by the sphere to produce an effect. In this case, the vicinity of the inner rail 61 (below the light projection range E0 in FIGS. 11 (a) and 12 (b)) can be brightly illuminated in front view.

With reference to FIG. 12, the flow of the sphere will be described when the moving upper lid member 332 forms the overhanging state and when the moving upper lid member 332 forms the retracted state. 12 (a) and 12 (b) are partial front views of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 12A, the case where the moving upper lid member 332 forms the overhanging state (see FIG. 11B) is shown, and in FIG. 12B, the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state (FIG. 11). The case of forming (see (a)) is illustrated, and in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b), the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320 is illustrated by an imaginary line. In addition, in FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B, whether or not the moving upper lid member 332 is overhanging is shown by the presence or absence of shading. That is, in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b), the portion where the shading is formed is in contact with the front plate member 320 or the front plate so as to block the passage of the ball between the front plate member 320 and the front plate member 320. It is a part close to the member 320.

In the state shown in FIG. 12A, the ball falling on the path C2 flows down along the upper side surface of the moving upper lid member 332 and is discharged to the out port 314. In this case, the weight of the ball may cause the moving upper lid member 332 to fall down, and when the left and right ends of the moving upper lid member 332 are moved below the step portion 324a, the ball is discharged to the out port 314. It becomes impossible and interferes with the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the moving upper lid member 332 has a length several times as long as the length overhanging the front side of the deformed through hole 331a (about four times as long, see FIG. 11B). It is accommodated in the deformed through hole 331a and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the side surface of the deformed through hole 331a in the vertical direction over the front-rear direction of the variable winning device 330. Therefore, by reducing the clearance between the moving upper lid member 332 and the deformed through hole 331a, it is possible to prevent the moving upper lid member 332 from falling down due to the weight of the sphere colliding with the moving upper lid member 332. As a result, the left and right end portions of the moving upper lid member 332 can be formed at the surface position with the step portion 324a, and the road nail to the specific winning opening 65a can be lowered downward, so that the lower part of the third symbol display device 81 can be formed. The edge can be lowered downwards.

As shown in FIG. 12B, when the moving upper lid member 332 forms a retracted state, the ball can flow down toward the specific winning opening 65a. At this time, the ball that rolls on the path C1 from the left and right along the inner rail 61 collides with the step portion 324a and is discharged to the out opening 314, so that the ball falls on the path C2 from above toward the specific winning opening 65a. Rolls on the inner rail 61 and reaches the specific winning opening 65a.

Here, in the present embodiment, the vertical width of the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a is formed to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. That is, the vertical distance from the inner rail 61 at the left and right ends of the moving upper lid member 332 is formed to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the height of the step portion 324a from the inner rail 61 can be lowered, and the arrangement of the out port 314 to which the ball falling from the step portion 324a reaches can also be lowered.

Further, in this case, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter from the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a (in addition, in the present embodiment, the entry of the ball is blocked by the base plate 60). However, since the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed along the inner rail 61, the ball flowing down to the front side of the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a rolls toward the center of the game area along the inner rail 61 due to gravity. It is moved and enters the specific winning opening 65a from there. Since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed so as to be inclined rearward (see FIG. 11), the ball can be smoothly entered into the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 12).

As a result, the moving upper lid member 332 forming the upper side of the specific winning opening 65a is separated upward from the inner rail 61 by the diameter of the sphere or more at least near the center of the game area (near where the inner rail 61 is arranged at the lowest position). Therefore, the arrangement position of the moving upper lid member 332 can be lowered downward. Therefore, the arrangement position of the variable winning device 330 can be lowered as compared with the case where the inner rail 61 needs to be separated upward from the inner rail 61 by a diameter larger than the diameter of the sphere at a position other than the vicinity of the center of the inner rail 61. As a result, a space on the back side of the game board 13 can be secured, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be lowered downward.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the functions of the ball sink ribs 311c and 321a and the ball feed portion 325 and the light being collected by the front inclined side surface 332a1f will be described. 13 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower board unit 300 in line XIIIa-XIIIa of FIG. 12 (b), and FIG. 13 (b) is a lower board unit 300 in line XIIIb-XIIIb of FIG. 12 (a). 13 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the board surface lower unit 300 in which the arrangement of the light irradiation unit 331c1 is virtually changed from FIG. 13 (b).

In FIG. 13A, the rolling path of the sphere is described by the paths C1a, C1b, and C2a, and the moving upper lid member 332 in the retracted state is illustrated by an imaginary line. The moving upper lid member 332 is on the front side (upper side of FIG. 12B) with respect to the cross section of FIG. 13A and is not actually visible, but for convenience of explanation, it is viewed in the vertical direction (paper surface of FIG. 13). It is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 13 (a) in a state where the positions (vertical view) match. Further, in FIGS. 13 (b) and 13 (c), three spheres flowing down the lower passage 331b are virtually illustrated.

The path of the ball that is rolled from the left-right direction along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 6) and discharged to the out port 314 will be described. As shown in FIG. 13A, the ball rolling from the left-right direction toward the center of FIG. 13A abuts on at least one of the ball sink rib 311c or the ball sink rib 321a. That is, the ball that rolls while contacting the main body plate portion 311 of the front unit 310 abuts on the ball sink rib 311c, and the ball that rolls while contacting the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320 is a ball sink rib. It abuts on 321a.

Here, when the ball comes into contact with the ball sink rib 311c, the velocity direction of the ball faces in the direction along the path C1a, and then the ball comes into contact with the ball sink rib 321a. Therefore, regardless of whether the ball rolls while contacting the main body plate portion 311 of the front unit 310 or while contacting the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320, the rolling ball is lengthened. It can be brought into contact with the rib 321a.

By bringing the ball rolling along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 6) into contact with the ball flow rib 321a, the velocity direction of the ball can be directed in the direction along the path C1b. In this case, the velocity of the ball can be directed to the back side (upper side of FIG. 13A) before the ball is arranged on the front side of the out port 314. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from when the ball is arranged on the front side of the out port 314 until the ball is discharged from the game area, and it is possible to suppress the ball from staying on the front side of the out port 314. At the same time, the opening width of the out port 314 can be suppressed. As a result, when the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 5) and the out opening 314 are arranged side by side, the arrangement of the specific winning opening 65a can be lowered below the game area.

A case where the spheres fall between the stepped portions 324a arranged in parallel on the left and right sides will be described. In this case, the ball that has fallen between the step portions 324a rolls toward the center in the left-right direction, and the ball comes into contact with the left-right side surface 325b of the ball feed portion 325, so that the velocity direction of the ball is path C2a (inner rail). A game ball flowing down the upper surface of the 61 to the left and right collides with the left and right side surfaces 325b of the ball feeding portion 325, the velocity direction of the game ball is switched to the direction toward the lower passage 331b, and the game ball flows down toward the lower passage 331b. At that time, it changes along the path through which the game ball passes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from staying on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 5), so that over-winning can be suppressed.

When the sphere flows down along the lower passage 331b and crosses the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the sphere shields the light so that the light does not reach the front inclined side surface 332a1f. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball has won the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 12) depending on whether the light projection range E0 of the front inclined side surface 332a1f or the front plate member 320 is visually recognized brightly or darkly. can.

As a result, as in the present embodiment, the front plate member 320 formed of a light-transmitting resin material is arranged in front of the specific winning opening 65a, and the inside of the specific winning opening 65a is difficult to see. Also, it can be confirmed that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a due to the change in the brightness of the light projection range E0. Therefore, it is not necessary to remove the specific winning opening 65a from diagonally above in order to confirm that the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, and the burden on the player can be eased.

In the present embodiment, the irradiation direction of the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 and the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b intersect at an angle close to a right angle (see FIG. 13B). Therefore, the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a as compared with the case where the ball flows down in the direction of the light traveling (see FIG. 13C) and the case where the ball flows down along the light irradiation direction. The period during which the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b blocks light can be shortened. In other words, it is possible to prolong the period during which the light projection range E0 of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320 is brightly visible, and it is possible to secure the directing ability of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320.

As shown in FIG. 13B, when the light path E1 and the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b intersect (cross) at an angle close to a right angle, the light path E1 is blocked by the sphere. Later, around the point where the sphere passes the front end portion (right side of FIG. 13B) of the lower passage 331b, the light is not blocked by the sphere (the light reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f).

In this case, even if the spheres are connected and flow down the lower passage 331b, the path E1 is shielded for each sphere. By checking, the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a can be confirmed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13C, when the light path E3 and the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b are close to parallel, after the light path E3 is blocked by the sphere, When the sphere reaches the rear end of the lower passage 331b (left side of FIG. 13C, near the sensor S) and falls downward, the light is not blocked by the sphere (so that the light reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f). Become). That is, until then, the light path E3 remains blocked by the sphere.

In this case, when the spheres flow down the lower passage 331b in a row, the light path E3 is blocked by the first sphere (the sphere on the left side of FIG. 13C) as long as the spheres are arranged in the lower passage 331b. Further, after the first sphere falls downward from the rear end of the lower passage 331b (left side in FIG. 13 (c)), the light path to the second sphere (the sphere on the right side in FIG. 13 (c)). E3 is blocked. Moreover, when the second sphere falls from the rear end of the lower passage 331b, if the next sphere (third sphere) enters the lower passage 331b, the path of light to that sphere. E3 is blocked. In this way, the sphere continues to block the light path E3 and is always visible dark while the sphere is flowing down the lower passage 331b. That is, the number of times the light is visually recognized brightly or darkly is not always the same as the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a, and the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a is the same. Confirmation becomes difficult. On the other hand, the present embodiment has the above-mentioned advantages.

As shown in FIG. 13A, since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be recessed toward the back side toward the central portion in the left-right direction, the light emitted from the pair of left and right light irradiating portions 331c1 is formed on the front inclined side surface 332a1f. By being reflected, the light is focused on the center of the front plate member 320 along the path E1 and reaches the light projection range E0 (see FIG. 12B).

Here, in the present embodiment, since the front plate member 320 is arranged on the front side of the moving upper lid member 332, the specific winning opening 65a can be hidden, while the front inclined side surface 332a1f is visually recognized through the front plate member 320. Therefore, it may be difficult to grasp the change in the brightness of the front inclined side surface 332a1f. In that case, it is necessary to increase the light intensity of a light emitting element such as an LED used for the light irradiation unit 331c1, and there is a problem that the light emitting element that can be used for the light irradiation unit 331c1 is limited.

On the other hand, since the front inclined side surface 332a1f collects the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 toward the center of the front plate member 320, the light emitted from the pair of light irradiation units 331c1 is overlapped with each other. It is possible to improve the intensity of light visually recognized in the light projection range E0. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in selecting a light emitting element that can be used for the light irradiation unit 331c1 (it is possible to select a light emitting element having a weak light intensity).

Further, since the light emitted from the pair of light irradiation units 331c1 is partially overlapped and visually recognized in the front view (see FIG. 12B), the pair of light irradiation is performed by making the colors of the light different from each other. A total of three colors of light, that is, the color of the light emitted from the unit 331c1 and the color in which they are combined, can be visually recognized in the light projection range E0 (see FIG. 12B).

Here, since the light emitted from each of the pair of light irradiation units 331c1 is shielded by the spheres that independently roll along the path C2a (see FIG. 13), the timing at which the spheres shield the light is set. The color of the light visually recognized in the projection range E0 can be switched in various ways.

For example, in FIG. 13, consider a case where the light irradiation unit 331c1 on the right side irradiates "blue" color light and the light irradiation unit 331c1 on the left side irradiates "red" color light. In this case, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state, light is emitted in the light projection range E0 (see FIG. 12B) in the order of "blue", "purple (overlapping part)", and "red" from the right side. Is visually recognized.

In this case, if the sphere rolls on the path C2a on the right side of FIG. 13 to block the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the "blue" color light is blocked, so that the light projection range E0 Only "red" light is visible in.

On the other hand, when the sphere rolls on the path C2a on the left side of FIG. 13 and shields the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the "red" color light is shielded. Only "blue" light is visible.

In this way, the mode of light visually recognized in the light projection range E0 can be changed depending on which path the sphere rolls and which light irradiation unit 331c1 blocks the light. Since this change in the mode of light is caused by a sphere that flows down the game area in a random path while colliding with a nail or the like, the change in the mode of light can be caused at a random timing. That is, as compared with the case where the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiating unit 331c1 is changed by electronic control, it is possible to perform an effect rich in randomness, and it is possible to improve the effect.

In the present embodiment, the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed in a dogleg shape when viewed from above, but from the viewpoint of condensing light, it may be formed in a parabolic shape when viewed from above.

The contents of ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14A is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 14B shows the first hit type counter C4 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. 14 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C5 and the hit in the ordinary symbol.

As shown in FIG. 14A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a type selection table 202b per first, and a random number table 202c per second as a part of the fixed value data described above. , And the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

The first hit random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C5, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec), is stored. When the value of the first random number counter C5 acquired based on the starting prize matches any of the determination values defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14B) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C4 is each jackpot type. , And the type of winning opening that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C4 is selected.

Specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first winning opening 64), the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 19". Is defined with the jackpot A associated with it (see 202b1 in FIG. 14B).

If the jackpot is A, a 10-round jackpot game is executed. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 1500 prize balls.

The jackpot B is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C4 is "20 to 49" (see 202b2 in FIG. 14B).

If the jackpot is B, a 6-round jackpot game is executed. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 900 prize balls.

The jackpot C is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C4 is "50 to 99" (see 202b3 in FIG. 14B).

If the jackpot is C, a jackpot game of 4 rounds is executed. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 600 prize balls.

As described above, when a big hit is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first winning opening 64), the difference in the number of prize balls paid out by the player appears as the difference in the number of rounds, and the rounds. As the number increases, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases, and the time required for the jackpot game also increases.

In the jackpot based on the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first winning opening 64), there is a 20% chance of winning a 10-round jackpot, while a 50% chance of winning a 4-round jackpot. , Basically, you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, since the 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, it is possible to start launching the ball for the subsequent jackpot acquisition at an early stage.

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 640), the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 79", which is a big hit. a is associated and defined (see 202b4 in FIG. 14B).

If the jackpot a is reached, a 15-round jackpot game is executed. In this case, the player can receive a payout (maximum payout) of about 2250 prize balls.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is "80 to 89", the jackpot b is associated and defined (see 202b5 in FIG. 14B).

When the jackpot b is reached, a 10-round jackpot game is executed as in the case of the jackpot A. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 1500 prize balls.

The jackpot c is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C4 is "90 to 99" (see 202b6 in FIG. 14B).

When the jackpot c is reached, the jackpot game of 8 rounds is executed. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 1200 prize balls.

As described above, the jackpot generated in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 640) is a jackpot a (maximum payout jackpot) with a probability of 80%. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of payouts expected when the lottery of the special symbol 2 is a big hit, as compared with the number of payouts expected when the lottery of the special symbol 1 is a big hit.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit is increased. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second winning opening 640, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be performed. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the probabilistic state of the special symbol, which is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol and is likely to be a big hit a (big hit of the maximum ball) when it becomes a big hit, is repeated. Since it becomes easier, it becomes easier for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 14C) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5-28" is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 14 (c)). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, "5-204" is defined as the determination value that is the hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 14 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C5 acquired based on the passage of the sphere through the through gate 67 and the second random number table 202c are referred to, and a normal symbol is hit. It is judged whether or not there is. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 28. In the first embodiment, the case where the internal shape of the flow path through which the game ball passing through the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 flows is unchanged has been described, but the board surface lower unit 2300 in the second embodiment has the moving upper lid. A movable effect member 2360 that operates inside a flow path through which a game ball that has passed the front side of the member 332 flows down is provided. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

15 and 16 are front exploded perspective views of the game board 13 and the lower board unit 2300 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 17 is a rear exploded perspective view of the game board 13 and the lower board unit 2300.

Note that FIG. 15 shows a state in which only the front plate member 2320 is disassembled from the game board 13, and in FIGS. 16 and 17, the front unit 310 of the board lower unit 2300 and the variable winning device 2330 are further played from FIG. The state of being disassembled from the board 13 is shown. Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the game board 13 is illustrated as an opening by omitting the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) and the block members forming the flow bottom surface at the lower left and right sides, and the like. It is shown in a simplified manner with only 60 left.

As shown in FIG. 15, a specific winning opening 65a is formed along the lower edge of the inner rail 61. Since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed from a downwardly convex curved shape, the arrangement position of the specific winning opening 65a is set as compared with the case where the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed by a straight line along the left-right direction. Can be lowered downwards. The outer edge of the specific winning opening 65a has an upper side formed of a moving upper lid member 332 (see FIG. 16), a lower side formed of a lower edge of the inner rail 61, and left and right sides of the left and right walls of the opening upper portion 313. Formed in parts.

As will be described later, the specific winning opening 65a is switched between the closed state and the open state described above by sliding the moving upper lid member 332 back and forth, and the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is, for example, 15 at the maximum. It can be repeated once (15 rounds).

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the board lower surface unit 2300 is a unit constituting the out port 314 from which the ball is discharged and the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 15), and is located in the lower part of the game board 13. A front unit 310 that is fitted and fastened to the receiving opening 60a drilled in the front-rear direction from the front side and a front plate that is fastened and fixed to the front unit 310 from the front side and a ball path is formed on the back side. It mainly includes a member 2320 and a variable winning device 2330 including a moving upper lid member 332 that is fitted into the receiving opening 60a from the back surface side, fastened and fixed, and changes the flow direction of the ball.

Although the front unit 310 has undergone minor design changes in response to the design changes of the front plate member 2320 and the variable winning device 2330, it maintains the above-described configuration in the first embodiment. Since the characteristic parts of each configuration are the same, the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment are added, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Explaining the detailed design change, in the present embodiment, the vertical width of the left and right wall portions of the opening upper portion 313 (corresponding to the left and right wall portions of the specific winning opening 65a) is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball. Will be done.

Further, the out openings 314 are formed in pairs on the left and right sides of the opening upper portion 313, and the lower side of the out opening 314 is arranged below the left and right upper corners of the opening upper portion 313 as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, unlike the first embodiment, the upper side of the out port 314 is arranged downward.

The front plate member 2320 is a plate-shaped member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes the main body plate portion 321 described above in the first embodiment, the first winning opening front portion 322, and the electric accessory lower support portion. A 323 and a ball feed portion 325 are provided, and as a difference from the first embodiment, an out port lower plate 2324 arranged along the lower side surface of the out port 314 is provided.

The out port lower plate 2324 is provided with thin ribs extending in the front-rear direction on the upper side surface in a row in the left-right direction. Further, the out port lower plate 2324 includes a step portion 2324a projecting upward at the left and right inner end portions. The unevenness formed on the upper side surface of the out port lower plate 2324 can decelerate the flowing ball. Further, the ribs formed on the outer opening lower plate 2324 are formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back surface side. As a result, the ball that has flowed down can be quickly discharged to the out port 314.

Since the inclined plate portion 312 described above is formed directly above the out opening lower plate 2324 (see FIG. 27), a ball that falls after rolling the inclined plate portion 312 is directed toward the out opening lower plate 2324. It is suppressed from falling. That is, the ball that falls after rolling the inclined plate portion 312 falls inside the pair of out-port lower plates 2324 in the left-right direction (position where the moving upper lid member 332 is arranged), or falls on the out-port lower plate 2324. It either falls to the outer end portion (near the ball sink rib 321a and at the boundary position between the rib formation range and the rail through which the ball flows). Both of these are outside the rib formation range. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling onto the out-mouth lower plate 2324 from a high place, and it is possible to improve the durability of the out-mouth lower plate 2324.

The step portion 2324a has a longer vertical width than the step portion 324a of the first embodiment (it is considered to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball), and is formed between the out opening 314 and the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 15). The sphere that flows down from the left-right direction and flows down the upper side surface of the out-port lower plate 2324 is prevented from flowing down beyond the step portion 2324a to the central portion in the left-right direction (see FIG. 27). ). That is, the ball that flows down from the left-right direction and flows down the upper side surface of the out port lower plate 2324 is exclusively guided to the out port 314.

Next, the variable winning device 2330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20. 18 is a front exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 2330, FIG. 19 is a rear exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 2330, and FIG. 20A is a top view of the variable winning device 2330. 20 (b) is a front view of the variable winning device 2330, and FIG. 20 (c) is a side view of the variable winning device 2330 in the direction of arrow XXc of FIG. 20 (b). In addition, in FIGS. 18 to 20, the tilted state of the movable effect member 2360 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the variable winning device 2330 includes a main body member 2331 forming a skeleton and a moving upper lid member 332 which is inserted into the main body member 2331 from the front and is formed so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. At least, a solenoid 2333 that generates a driving force for sliding the moving upper lid member 332 and a lever member 334b that is swung by the solenoid 2333 are housed, and a rear lid member 334 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 2331. A first transmission member 2340 that moves up and down as the claw portion 2333c integrally formed with the hook-shaped member 333b of the solenoid 2333 moves up and down, and a second transmission member 2350 that interlocks with the first transmission member 2340. It mainly includes a movable directing member 2360 which is pivotally supported by a front end portion of the main body member 2331 and changes its posture by a load given from a second transmission member 2350.

The main body member 2331 constitutes a main body front portion 2331F that constitutes a front portion of the flow path through which the game ball that has passed through the sensor S flows down, and a left and right side portions and a back surface portion of the flow path through which the game ball that has passed through the sensor S flows down. 2331B at the rear of the main body. In this embodiment, the illustration of the light irradiation device 331c (see FIG. 8) described above in the first embodiment is omitted.

The front portion 2331F of the main body includes a front opening 331a1 of a deformed through hole 331a through which a moving upper lid member 332 is inserted, and a lower passage 331b through which a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 15) flows down.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the main body front portion 2331F is formed from an extended floor portion 2331e extending in a plate shape in the left-right outward direction from the upper end of the lower passage 331b and an extended end of the extended floor portion 2331e. An extension wall portion 2331f extending upward, and a pair of left and right support wall portions 2331g whose front ends are arranged on the front side of the extension wall portion 2331f on the left and right outside of the extension wall portion 2331f. The pair of support wall portions 2331g is mainly provided with a recessed support portion 2331h which is recessed from the front side to the back side and is configured to be able to support the movable effect member 2360.

The extended floor portion 2331e is configured such that the front end portion is arranged below the movable effect member 2360 (see FIG. 20B) and is inclined downward to the lower passage 331b side in the left-right direction. Therefore, when the game ball rides on the extended floor portion 2331e by rolling on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 in the tilted state, the game ball is rolled to the lower passage 331b side along the inclination of the extended floor portion 2331e. Can be made to.

The extended wall portion 2331f is arranged with a slight gap between it and the support wall portion 2331g. This gap is sized so that the sliding portion 2363 of the movable effect member 2360, which will be described later, can enter, and is for suppressing the posture deviation of the movable effect member 2360 while the sliding portion 2363 enters the gap. be. That is, the posture deviation of the movable effect member 2360 can be suppressed by the extended wall portion 2331f.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19, the main body front portion 2331F extends vertically in a plate shape at a position slightly longer than the left-right width of the first transmission member 2340 from the inner surface Ins of the wall portion constituting the left side surface. A first transmission support portion 2331i to be provided, and a pair of second transmission support portions 2331j recessed toward the front side in a manner in which the second transmission member 2350 is pivotally supported at the rear end portion so as to be tilted (rotatable). To be equipped.

The first transmission support portion 2331i functions as a portion that guides the movement (regulates the movement direction) of the first transmission member 2340 arranged between the first transmission support portion 2331i and the inner surface Ins of the wall portion. That is, the first transmission support portion 2331i is disposed with the inner surface Ins at a distance slightly longer than the left-right width direction of the first transmission member 2340. As a result, the first transmission member 2340 is restricted from moving in the left-right direction and is allowed to move in the up-down direction.

The second transmission support portion 2331j is a portion that pivotally supports the shaft-supported protrusion 2352 formed at the rear end portion (one end portion) of the second transmission member 2350. Therefore, the front end portion (the other end portion) of the second transmission member 2350 is arranged in front of the second transmission support portion 2331j.

The rear portion 2331B of the main body is a recess formed by denting the rear opening 331a2 of the deformed through hole 331a into which the moving upper lid member 332 is inserted and the rear opening side toward the front side, and accommodates the solenoid 2333, the lever member 334b, and the like. Mainly includes a rear side accommodating portion 2331d to be formed.

The rear side accommodating portion 2331d is formed from a shape in which the claw portion 2333c of the solenoid 2333 can be arranged inside (it has a shape that bulges to the left).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the rear portion 2331B of the main body is bored in the front-rear direction with a left-right width slightly wider than the left-right width of the claw portion 2333c of the solenoid 2333, and can guide the vertical movement of the claw portion 2333c. 2331s of elongated holes extending in the vertical direction, and 2331t of recessed portions recessed from the front side surface to the back surface side above the elongated hole portions 2331s.

The recessed portion 2331t is arranged so as to face the second transmission support portion 2331j in the front-rear direction in the assembled state, and is slightly larger than the radius of the base end cylindrical portion 2351 formed at the rear end portion (one end portion) of the second transmission member 2350. It is recessed with a radius of curvature (an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft-supported protrusion 2352).

As a result, when the second transmission member 2350 is pivotally supported in the shaft hole portion formed by covering the second transmission support portion 2331j on the front side surface of the main body rear portion 2331B, the rear end portion of the second transmission member 2350 The base end cylindrical portion 2351 and the recessed portion 2331t of (one end portion) can be maintained in a state of being equidistantly separated at a predetermined angle.

In this case, for example, when the second transmission member 2350 rotates, its rotation axis shifts, and when the rear end portion (one end portion) of the second transmission member 2350 rubs against the recessed portion 2331t, it is not a point. Since it can be brought into contact with the surface and rubbed, it is possible to delay the wear of the second transmission member 2350 and suppress the damage of the second transmission member 2350.

The solenoid 2333 is arranged below the main body 2333a that generates an upward driving force by passing an electric current and the main body 333a, and is usually arranged at the lower end position by a urging spring below the lever member 334b. A hook-shaped hook-shaped member 333b that rises to the upper end position by the driving force of the main body portion 333a, and the hook-shaped member 333b are extended to the left from the base end portion (upper part) connected to the main body portion 2333a, and then. It mainly includes a bent rod-shaped claw portion 2333c extending forward.

The claw portion 2333c is configured to have a shape that tapers toward the front of the tip portion, and is inserted into the elongated hole portion 2331s from the back surface side in the assembled state (see, for example, FIG. 20). Then, the tip portion protruding toward the front side of the elongated hole portion 2331s is inserted into the insertion portion 2343 of the first transmission member 2340 from the back surface side. Since the claw portion 2333c has a tapered shape, it can be easily inserted.

The first transmission member 2340 is a member accommodated between the inner surface Ins and the first transmission support portion 2331i in the assembled state (see, for example, FIG. 20), and has a plate-shaped portion 2341 forming the left side surface. An overhanging portion 2342 that projects to the right in a block shape from the middle portion of the plate-shaped portion 2341, an inserted portion 2343 that is recessed toward the front side on the rear side surface of the overhanging portion 2342, and an overhanging portion. A lower extension plate portion 2344 extending downward so as to have a plate shape having a front side surface and a surface position surface and a left side surface and a surface position surface of the 2342, and a left side from the upper right side surface of the plate-shaped portion 2341. It mainly includes a protruding portion 2345 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape.

The length from the right side surface of the plate-shaped portion 2341 to the left end of the overhanging portion 2342 and the lower extension plate portion 2344 is slightly shorter than the distance from the inner surface Ins to the right side surface of the first transmission support portion 2331i.

The plate-shaped portion 2341 has a long plate-shaped main body portion 2341a that is long in the vertical direction, an upper front overhanging portion 2341b that projects forward with the same thickness at the upper portion of the main body portion 2341a, and a lower portion of the main body portion 2341a that has the same thickness. It is provided with a lower rear overhanging portion 2341c that overhangs to the rear side.

The insertion portion 2343 is a recess into which the claw portion 2333c of the solenoid 2333 is inserted, and the recess width (upper and lower, left and right) and the recess depth are formed from a shape into which the claw portion 2333c of the solenoid 2333 can be inserted. .. That is, the claw portion 2333c is formed from a shape that can be fitted to the inserted portion 2343. As described above, since the claw portion 2333c has a tapered shape (tapered shape), it is easy to insert the claw portion 2333c into the inserted portion 2343.

The first transmission member 2340 and the second transmission member 2350 are connected by inserting the protrusion 2345 through the second transmission member 2350. Here, the connection does not only refer to structural connection, but also to operational connection (following operation, synchronous operation, etc.). That is, the second transmission member 2350 rotates as the first transmission member 2340 moves up and down.

The second transmission member 2350 is a member rotatably supported by the second transmission support portion 2331j of the front portion 2331F of the main body, and has a cylindrical base end cylindrical portion 2351 having an axis in the left-right direction at the rear end portion. A pair of shaft-supported projecting portions 2352, which are cylindrical with a small coaxial diameter and project in the left-right direction with respect to the base-end columnar portion 2351, and a rod-shaped extension along the left end of the base-end columnar portion 2351. Mainly a extending rod-shaped portion 2353 and an insertion hole 2354 formed in the middle portion of the extending rod-shaped portion 2353 in a long elongated hole shape in the left-right direction along the longitudinal direction of the extending rod-shaped portion 2353. Prepare for.

The axial length (left-right direction) of the base end cylindrical portion 2351 is slightly shorter than the distance (left-right distance) between the second transmission support portions 2331j.

The protruding length of the shaft-supported protruding portion 2352 is equal to the thickness of the second transmission support portion 2331j, and the diameter of the shaft-supported protruding portion 2352 is larger than the recessed width (vertical width) of the second transmission support portion 2331j. Is also shortened slightly.

Therefore, in a state where the shaft-supported protrusion 2352 is supported by the second transmission support portion 2331j, the axial (left-right direction) misalignment of the base end cylindrical portion 2351 is caused by the plate on which the second transmission support portion 2331j is formed. It can be regulated by the department.

The left-right width of the extending rod-shaped portion 2353 is slightly shorter than the length obtained by subtracting the thickness of the plate-shaped portion 2341 from the distance between the inner surface Ins and the first transmission support portion 2331i. Therefore, since the extended rod-shaped portion 2353 is arranged at a position where it does not interfere with the plate-shaped portion 2341 of the first transmission member 2340, it can be interlocked with each other without interfering with each other.

The insertion hole 2354 is a long hole through which the protrusion 2345 is inserted, and the width in the lateral direction is designed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 2345.

The movable effect member 2360 is supported by the front portion 2331F of the main body so as to be tilted (rotated), and is a plate-shaped member that rotates between the tilted state and the standing state (each of which is arranged at the end position of rotation). A thin plate-shaped main body plate portion 2361, a pair of support shaft portions 2362 projecting in a columnar shape in the left-right direction from the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 2361, and an upward along the right end of the main body plate portion 2361. The sliding portion 2363 formed in a substantially fan shape at the center of the support shaft portion 2362 and the left and right pairs formed in a substantially fan shape at the center of the support shaft portion 2362 on the opposite side of the sliding portion 2363 sandwiching the support shaft portion 2362. Mainly includes a transmission portion 2364 and a recessed portion 2365 that is recessed toward the upper end side at the lower end portion of the central position of the main body plate portion 2361.

The support shaft portion 2362 is configured as a portion rotatably fitted into the recessed support portion 2331h, and the main body plate portion 2361 is formed between the support shaft portions 2362. Therefore, similarly to the moving upper lid member 332, the game ball and the main body plate portion 2361 can interfere with each other (collision) regardless of the left and right positions where the game ball passes through the specific winning opening 65a.

After the support shaft portion 2362 is fitted into the recessed support portion 2331h, the recessed support portion 2331h is covered with a plate-shaped member cp from the front side.

The sliding portion 2363 has a substantially arc-shaped front side portion having a radius of the front-rear width of the main body plate portion 2361 at the center of the support shaft portion 2362, and is slightly larger than the gap between the extended wall portion 2331f and the support wall portion 2331g. It is a substantially fan-shaped plate-shaped part with a short thickness.

The transmission unit 2364 arranged on the right side in the front view is a portion where the driving force is transmitted from the second transmission member 2350.

The transmission unit 2364 arranged on the left side of the front view abuts on the back surface (lower surface) of the extended floor portion 2331e in the tilted state of the movable effect member 2360, and functions as a stopper that defines the lower limit of the movement range of the movable effect member 2360. It is a part.

The shape of the upper side surface of the transmission unit 2364 corresponds to the operating angle of the movable effect member 2360, and the details will be described later.

The recessed portion 2365 is formed at a recessed depth that allows the game ball to pass between the movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 15) in the upright state (see FIG. 25 (a)). Specifically, the recessed width is the same as the left-right width of the lower passage 331b, and is formed from a recessed depth similar to the diameter of the game ball along the lateral direction of the main body plate portion 2361. By forming the recessed portion 2365, the shaft support position of the movable effect member 2360 can be further arranged downward.

In the present embodiment, the variable winning device 2330 is arranged at a position where the distance between the rotation axis of the movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61 is less than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, when the game ball enters the front side of the movable effect member 2360, the game ball may be clogged between the movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61, which may hinder the game. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the movable effect member 2360 is provided with the recessed portion 2365, even if the game ball enters the front side of the movable effect member 2360, the game ball is recessed. It can flow through between 2365 and the inner rail 61.

As a result, the arrangement of the variable winning device 2330 can be lowered downward while preventing the game ball from being clogged between the movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61.

Since the force that keeps the movable effect member 2360 in the tilted state is only its own weight, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball that has entered between the movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61 is hindered by the load. Can be done.

The recessed width of the recessed portion 2365 is formed in a range in which the game ball cannot fall from the game area, that is, inside the left-right width of the electric accessory under support portion 323 (see FIG. 16). That is, the game ball that has fallen from the moving upper lid member 332 when the movable effect member 2360 is in an inclined state falls exclusively on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360.

With reference to FIG. 21, a flow mode of the game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 will be described. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 2330 in the XXI-XXI line of FIG. 20 (b). In addition, in FIG. 21, the retracted state of the moving upper lid member 332 and the tilted state of the movable effect member 2360 are shown.

In FIG. 21, the moving upper lid member 332 operates from the state where the game ball is on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 in the overhanging state toward the retracted state, so that the game ball that has fallen from the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 flows down. An example of the embodiment and the outer shape of the movable upper lid member 332 in the overhanging state are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 21, after the game ball bounces on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360, it is possible to form a portion where at least a part of the game ball can reach above the lower bottom surface of the deformed through hole 331a. , The arrangement and material (mainly the coefficient of restitution) of the movable effect member 2360 are set.

As a result, the movement of the game ball that has fallen from the moving upper lid member 332 can be made violent, so that the attention to the game ball can be improved.

Further, as compared with the case where the game ball flows down without bouncing back, the time required from the game ball falling from the moving upper lid member 332 to passing through the sensor S can be lengthened, so that the so-called over-winning can be achieved. It can be easily generated.

In the present embodiment, after the moving upper lid member 332 is driven to the open state (retracted state), the game ball on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 bounces on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 and then reaches the highest position. The arrangement of the movable effect member 2360 is designed so that 0.2 seconds or more (about 0.4 seconds) elapse before reaching the position. As a result, the period during which the player can see the game ball in the directional view of the arrow I1 looking into the lower side of the moving upper lid member 332 from above the moving upper lid member 332 (the game ball is arranged directly under the moving upper lid member 332). Since the period until it disappears) can be lengthened, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player misses the game ball that has passed the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 in the direction of the arrow I1.

As a result, it is possible to easily grasp the number of game balls that pass through the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 and flow down to the sensor S in the game while keeping the direction of the arrow I1, so that the timing at which the moving upper lid member 332 is closed. Can be easily predicted. In this case, for example, in a game mode in which the launch of the game ball is stopped in a timely manner in order to prevent the game ball from reaching the moving upper lid member 332 when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the closed state (overhanging state), the launch of the game ball is performed. It is possible to easily measure the timing to stop.

In the present embodiment, the main body plate portion 2361 of the movable effect member 2360 is arranged at a position where the game ball falling from the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 lands, and the moving upper lid member 332 moves toward the closed state (overhanging state). As a result, the movable effect member 2360 rotates toward the upright state, so that the landing point of the game ball moves upward. As a result, the distance between the moving upper lid member 332 and the landing point of the game ball is shortened.

In other words, the displacement of the moving upper lid member 332 is a slide displacement in the substantially horizontal direction, whereas the displacement of the movable effect member 2360 is a rotational displacement centered on the rotation axis facing the substantially horizontal direction. The distance between the moving upper lid member 332 and the moving upper lid member 332 changes depending on the state (posture) of the effect member 2360. In the present embodiment, the change tends to shorten the distance as the moving upper lid member 332 moves toward the closed state (overhanging state).

As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the subsequent flow mode of the game ball that has fallen from the moving upper lid member 332. That is, in addition to the flow locus of the game ball landing on the movable effect member 2360 while the movable effect member 2360 is maintained in the tilted state, the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 while the movable effect member 2360 is displaced toward the upright state. The game ball can be caused to flow down by the flow path of the game ball that has stayed on the upper surface of the game ball or the movable effect member 2360 that lands on the ground. In the latter case, the game ball is subjected to a rearward upward load from the movable effect member 2360, so that the game ball moves violently.

Next, the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 2330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 25. 22 (a), 23 (a), 24 (a) and 25 (a) are cross-sectional views of the variable winning device 2330 in the XXa-XXa line of FIG. 20 (b), FIG. 22 (b). 23 (b), FIG. 24 (b) and FIG. 25 (b) are cross-sectional views of the variable winning device 2330 in line XXb-XXb of FIG. 20 (b).

In addition, in FIGS. 22 to 25, the appearance of the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c descending is shown in chronological order, and in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b), the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c are shown. The state in which the moving upper lid member 332 is placed at the uppermost position and is in the retracted state is shown. In FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b), the excitation (driving) of the solenoid 2333 is released from the state shown in FIG. , The hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c are slightly lowered, and the moving upper lid member 332 is set to the closing reference state. In FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b), the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion are shown. It is shown that the 2333c is further lowered and the moving upper lid member 332 is in an overhanging state. In FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c are further lowered to move the movable effect member 2360. Is shown in the standing state.

First, the difference in operation timing between the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 2360 will be described. The states shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b) are states in which the solenoid 2333 is excited.

When the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 is released from the states shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b), the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c are in the states shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b). It descends by the urging force of the return spring provided in the solenoid 2333. At this time, as the lever member 334b rotates, the moving upper lid member 332 slides to the front side, while the movable effect member 2360 maintains the tilted state (movable from the extended rod-shaped portion 2353 of the second transmission member 2350). No load is applied to the transmission unit 2364 of the effect member 2360).

That is, after the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 is released, the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 2360 do not start operating at the same time, but the movable upper lid member 332 projects before the movable effect member 2360. Start the operation toward the state.

In the present embodiment, in the closing reference state of the moving upper lid member 332 shown in FIG. 23, the distance between the moving upper lid member 332 and the front plate member 2320 is configured to be less than the diameter of the game ball. That is, by displacing the moving upper lid member 332 in the closing direction to the state shown in FIG. 23, the moving upper lid member 332 can restrict the passage of the game ball to the sensor S.

Here, from the state of FIG. 22 to the state of FIG. 23, the second transmission member 2350 does not come into contact with the movable effect member 2360, and the second transmission member 2350 is given a reaction force from the movable effect member 2360. There is no. Therefore, the weights of the second transmission member 2350 and the first transmission member 2340 can be directly applied to the hook-shaped member 333b via the claw portion 2333c.

As a result, the load related to the lowering of the hook-shaped member 333b can be increased, and the tilting operation of the lever member 334b can be started immediately after the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 is released, so that the moving upper lid member 332 can be started. Can be immediately started to move to the closed reference state and the overhanging state.

In addition, compared to the case where the movable effect member 2360 is applied with a load from the second transmission member 2350 from the start of the operation, the drive required at the start of the operation is likely to require an excessive driving force because it is necessary to overcome the inertia. The force can be reduced.

In addition, in the state shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B, since the game ball can fall on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360, the impact when the game ball collides with the movable effect member 2360 The movable effect member 2360 may jump up. In this case, in the present embodiment, since the extended rod-shaped portion 2353 of the second transmission member 2350 is arranged so as to project in the operation locus of the movable effect member 2360, the movable effect member 2360 is extended during the flip-up operation. It collides with the rod-shaped portion 2353.

As a result, the movable effect member 2360 receives a reaction force from the extending rod-shaped portion 2353 and returns to the tilted state at an early stage. Therefore, the movable effect member 2360 can be easily maintained in the tilted state. On the other hand, the direction in which the load is applied from the movable effect member 2360 to the extension rod-shaped portion 2353 due to the flip-up of the movable effect member 2360 is the direction in which the extension rod-shaped portion 2353 is rotated backward from the shape. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the extended rod-shaped portion 2353 from tipping forward due to a collision with the movable effect member 2360.

In the states shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b), the extended rod-shaped portion 2353 and the transmission portion 2364 of the movable effect member 2360 come into contact with each other while the hook-shaped member 333b of the solenoid 2333 and the claw portion 2333c are descending. It is in a state to start.

From the state shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b) to the state shown in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b), the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c are provided with a return spring provided in the solenoid 2333. As the extension rod-shaped portion 2353 descends by force, the extension tip of the extension rod-shaped portion 2353 descends while pushing down the upper surface of the transmission portion 2364 of the movable production member 2360. Corresponding to the degree of the descent, the movable effect member 2360 moves from the tilted state (see FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b)) to the upright state (see FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b)). Rotate.

As described above, in the closing reference state of the moving upper lid member 332 shown in FIG. 23A, the flow of the game ball toward the sensor S is already regulated by the moving upper lid member 332. That is, it is possible to prevent the movement of the movable effect member 2360 from hindering the flow of the game ball that has passed the front side of the moving upper lid member 332. For example, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has once passed the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 from bouncing back to the upper side of the moving upper lid member 332 due to the operation of the movable effect member 2360.

If the action of returning the game ball to the upper side of the moving upper lid member 332 is desired, the movable upper lid member 2360 may be displaced toward the upright state before the moving upper lid member 332 reaches the closing reference state. In this case, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of game balls from entering the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, in conjunction with the rotation of the movable effect member 2360, the moving upper lid member 332 slides to the front side and reaches the overhanging state as shown in FIG. 24 (a).

From the state shown in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b) to the state shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c are provided with a return spring provided in the solenoid 2333. As the extension rod-shaped portion 2353 descends by force, the extension tip of the extension rod-shaped portion 2353 descends while pushing down the upper surface of the transmission portion 2364 of the movable production member 2360. The movable effect member 2360 rotates toward the upright state (see FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b)) according to the degree of the descent.

In addition, in FIGS. 24A and 24B, the rear end surface of the hook-shaped member 333b is in a range in which the rear end surface of the hook-shaped member 333b can come into contact with the lower claw portion 334b3 of the lever member 334b in the rotation direction of the lower claw portion 334b3. The hook-shaped member 333b is in contact with the lower claw portion 334b3 at the upper end position until the state shown in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b) is changed to the state shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b). The rear end surface continues to be in contact with the front end surface of the lower claw portion 334b3 (a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction in the state shown in FIGS. 24 (a) and 25 (a)).

That is, even if the hook-shaped member 333b is lowered, the lever member 334b maintains the same posture, and the moving upper lid member 332 maintains the overhanging state. On the other hand, the first transmission member 2340 is lowered as the claw portion 2333c integrated with the hook-shaped member 333b is lowered, and the degree of rotation (tilt) of the second transmission member 2350 as the first transmission member 2340 is lowered. In response to this, the movable effect member 2360 rotates toward the upright state and stops in the upright state (see FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b)).

The center of gravity of the movable effect member 2360 is arranged above the support shaft portion 2362 in the upright state. Therefore, even if the movable effect member 2360 is in the upright state, it returns to the tilted state when the applied load is only its own weight.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the moving upper lid member 332 is changed to the retracted state and the movable effect member 2360 is changed to the tilted state by the excitation (driving) of the solenoid 2333, and then the solenoid is used. When the excitation (drive) of the 2333 is released, only the moving upper lid member 332 starts operating first, and then the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable directing member 2360 are interlocked (the movable upper lid member 2360 moves while the operation of the moving upper lid member 332 continues. After the movement upper lid member 332 is stopped, only the movable effect member 2360 rotates, and the movable effect member 2360 stops in an upright state as the claw portion 2333c of the solenoid 2333 reaches the end of the movement.

Briefly, the moving upper lid member 332 starts the operation earlier than the movable effect member 2360, and the movable upper lid member 332 also finishes the operation earlier than the movable effect member 2360.

Next, the deviation of the operation timing when the moving upper lid member 332 moves from the overhanging state to the retracted state and the movable effect member 2360 moves from the standing state to the tilted state will be described. Since the time lapse of the above-mentioned operation is the same as tracing the steps from FIG. 22 to FIG. 25 in the reverse direction, the above-mentioned operation will be described again with reference to FIGS. 22 to 25.

In the non-excited (non-driven) state of the solenoid 2333, as shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c are lowered by the urging force of the return spring provided in the solenoid 2333. Maintained in position.

When the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) from the state shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c rise. As shown in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b), the movable upper lid member 332 is maintained in the overhanging state for a while from the start of ascending, while the movable effect member 2360 changes from the standing state to the tilted state. Starts to rotate (tilt) toward. That is, the operation start timing of the movable effect member 2360 is earlier than the operation start timing of the moving upper lid member 332.

The movable effect member 2360 receives a load applied to the transmission unit 2364 when the extended rod-shaped portion 2353 of the second transmission member 2350, which has applied a downward load (counterclockwise when viewed from the left side) to the transmission unit 2364, retracts upward. Since it is eliminated, it rotates (tilts) due to its own weight to the position where the load is applied again (see FIG. 24 (b)). That is, how the movable effect member 2360 operates while the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c are raised depends on the shape of the extending rod-shaped portion 2353.

After passing through the states shown in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b), the upper surface of the hook-shaped member 333b pushes up the lower end surface Uns of the main body portion 334b1 of the lever member 334b due to the load applied to the lever member 334b. The lever member 334b starts rotating backward (counterclockwise when viewed from the left side), and the moving upper lid member 332 slides toward the retracted state accordingly. The movable effect member 2360 is rotated (tilted) to the state shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b) in conjunction with the sliding operation of the movable upper lid member 332, and the movable upper lid member 2360 is rotated (tilted) to the states shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b). The state shown in b) (tilted state) is set as the lower end to stop.

After passing through the states shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b), the state of the movable effect member 2360 is maintained in the tilted state, while the moving upper lid member 332 continues the backward sliding movement and is in the retracted state. (See FIG. 22 (a) and FIG. 22 (b)) is used as the end point position to stop.

As shown in FIG. 22A, when the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) and the hook-shaped member 333b is arranged at the upper end position, the contact between the hook-shaped member 333b and the lower end surface Uns of the lever member 334b is released. (The posture of the lever member 334b is stable when the hook-shaped member 333b and the lower end surface Uns of the lever member 334b are separated from each other).

In other words, in the state where the lever member 334b is arranged at the end position on the backflip side, a position slightly lower than the position where the contact with the lower end surface Uns starts is set as the upper limit of movement of the hook-shaped member 333b. As a result, when the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven), the hook-shaped member 333b rises to the position shown in FIG. 22A, and then the lever member 334b rotates by its own weight in the backflip direction to move. The upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state (see FIG. 22A).

Therefore, compared to the case where the hook-shaped member 333b pushes up the lever member 334b to the terminal position by exciting (driving) the solenoid 2333, the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state due to an irregular cause such as a dimensional error. Even after the hook-shaped member 333b rises, a load in the pushing direction is applied to the lever member 334b, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility that an excessive load is applied to the lever member 334b and the moving upper lid member 332. .. In other words, the accuracy required for the upper limit stop position of the hook-shaped member 333b can be reduced.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the moving upper lid member 332 changes to the overhanging state and the movable effect member 2360 changes to the standing state by releasing the excitation (driving) of the solenoid 2333. When the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven), only the movable effect member 2360 starts to operate, and then the movable upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 2360 are interlocked (the movable upper lid member 332 is in operation while the movable effect member 2360 is continuously operated). After the movable production member 2360 is stopped, only the moving upper lid member 332 slides, and after the hook-shaped member 333b of the solenoid 2333 reaches the end of movement, the lever member 334b backflip under its own weight. As a result, the moving upper lid member 332 slides backward, and the moving upper lid member 332 stops in the retracted state.

Briefly, the movable upper lid member 2360 starts the operation earlier than the moving upper lid member 332, and the movable upper lid member 332 also finishes the operation earlier than the movable upper lid member 2360.

Here, the operation end timing of the movable effect member 2360 depends on the weight and weight ratio of the movable effect member 2360, but in the present embodiment, the transmission unit 2364 of the movable effect member 2360 has an extended rod shape of the second transmission member 2350. It is designed so as to follow the movement while being in contact with the portion 2353 (so that the gap between the extending rod-shaped portion 2353 and the transmission portion 2364 is suppressed before the movable effect member 2360 is tilted). .. Therefore, the moving speed of the second transmission member 2350 directly affects the speed of the tilting operation of the movable effect member 2360.

As can be seen from the driving modes described above in FIGS. 22 to 25, the transmission path in which the driving force of the solenoid 2333 is transmitted to the moving upper lid member 332 and the transmission path transmitted to the movable effect member 2360 start from the solenoid 2333. It is a different route.

Thereby, in the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the load given from the game ball to the moving upper lid member 332 is transmitted to the movable effect member 2360. Further, since it is not necessary to physically connect the transmission path for transmitting the driving force to the moving upper lid member 332 and the transmission path for transmitting the driving force to the movable effect member 2360 at an intermediate position, the degree of freedom in design is improved. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the relationship between the operation of the solenoid 2333 by excitation (driving) and the operation of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 2360 will be described with a timing chart.

26 (a) to 26 (c) are diagrams showing timekeeping changes in the positions and states of the moving upper lid member 332, the solenoid 2333, and the movable effect member 2360 in the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 26A shows a timing chart for opening and closing the moving upper lid member 332, and FIGS. 26B and 26C show the moving upper lid member 332 while being maintained in the closed state. A timing chart for driving the movable effect member 2360 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 26 (a), the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 2360 change their states as the solenoid 2333 is switched between excitation and non-excitation, but a time difference occurs as described above. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

When the solenoid 2333 starts to be excited (driven) at the first time point t1, the movable effect member 2360 starts operating in conjunction with the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c of the solenoid 2333, and the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c are at the upper ends. At the third time point t3, which is before the fourth time point t4, the movable effect member 2360 is in an inclined state.

On the other hand, due to the excitation (driving) of the solenoid 2333, the moving upper lid member 332 starts the sliding operation toward the retracted state at the second time point t2 after the first time point t1 and before the third time point t3. , The moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state at a timing substantially equal to that at the fourth time point t4.

That is, the movable effect member 2360 operates in response to the operation of the moving upper lid member 332, but the operation is started before the moving upper lid member 332 starts the operation. In other words, the movable effect member 2360 starts operating at a timing preceding a predetermined period based on the timing at which the moving upper lid member 332 starts operating.

The "abbreviation" of "substantially equivalent" here means a time when the hook-shaped member 333b is arranged at the upper end position in a state where the lower end surfaces Uns of the hook-shaped member 333b and the lever member 334b are in contact with each other (t4 at the fourth time point). ), And the lower end surface Uns moves away from the hook-shaped member 333b, and the time difference between the upper lid member 332 and the retracted state is set as a slight difference, and these are regarded as simultaneous points.

When the solenoid 2333 begins to be de-energized (driven) at the 5th time point t5, the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c of the solenoid 2333 start operating at substantially the same timing as the 5th time point t5, and the hook The moving upper lid member 332 is in an overhanging state at the seventh time point t7 before the eighth time point t8 when the shape member 333b and the claw portion 2333c reach the lower end. The "abbreviation" of "substantially equivalent" here has the same intention as the above.

On the other hand, by releasing the excitation (driving) of the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 2360 starts rotating toward the upright state at the sixth time point t6, which is later than the fifth time point t5 and before the seventh time point t7. Then, at the eighth time point t8, the movable solenoid member 2360 is in an upright state.

The relative time relationship between the time points t1 to t8 shown in FIG. 26A is one with the positional relationship between the operation start and end points of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 2360 with respect to the movable range of the solenoid 2333. I am doing it. More specifically, among the points that divide the first time point t1 and the fourth time point t4 into seven equal parts, the second point from the first time point t1 side is the second time point t2, and from the first time point t1 side. The third point is the third time point t3. Further, since each time point t5 to t8 is illustrated in a mirror image relationship with respect to each time point t1 to t4, the same can be said for each time point t5 to t8.

Further, in the present embodiment, the coil and the iron core are configured so that it takes 0.1 seconds for the solenoid 2333 to reach from the lower end to the upper end by driving (excitation), and similarly, it reaches from the upper end to the lower end by the return spring. The urging force of the return spring is set so that it takes 0.1 seconds. It should be noted that these configurations and settings can be arbitrarily set depending on the purpose.

As is clear from the explanation again in FIG. 26 (a), the movable effect member 2360 and the moving upper lid member 332 are interlocked with the operation by the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333, but the movable effect member 2360 and the movable upper lid member 332 The operation timings are not simultaneous, but there is a time lag.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26A, the above-mentioned time difference is obtained from the movable effect member 2360 from the upright state as compared with the period (t2 to t7) in which the moving upper lid member 332 is in the state change from the overhanging state. The period during which the state is changing (t1 to t8) is lengthened. Similarly, the above-mentioned time difference determines the period (t3 to t6) in which the movable effect member 2360 is maintained in the tilted state as compared with the period (t4 to t5) in which the movable upper lid member 332 is maintained in the retracted state. Lengthen.

The player can visually recognize the operation mode of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 2360 through the front plate member 2320, and directly enters the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 15). The period during which the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state (the state in which the game ball is allowed to enter). The movable effect member 2360 is in a tilted state (a state in which it is easy to pick up the game ball). As a result, it is possible to give the impression that the game ball is more likely to enter the specific winning opening 65a as compared with the case where only the moving upper lid member 332 is visually recognized by the player.

Further, since the moving upper lid member 332 has a sliding motion in the front-rear direction, it may be difficult to recognize the change in the state from the front view. However, in the present embodiment, the movable upper lid member 332 is linked with the moving upper lid member 332. The member 2360 opens and closes by tilting (rotating) toward the front side. At this time, the design (the design on the front surface) that the player was visually recognizing when the movable production member 2360 was in the upright state is turned downward due to the movable production member 2360 being tilted, and is not visible to the player. , The appearance changes greatly. In addition, when the movable effect member 2360 is in the tilted state, the moving upper lid member 332 is maintained in the retracted state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the state of the moving upper lid member 332 can be grasped without directly looking at the moving upper lid member 332 by visually recognizing the change of the state of the movable effect member 2360. As a result, the state of the moving upper lid member 332 can be easily grasped as compared with the case where only the moving upper lid member 332 operates.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, there is one that notifies "Aim at the attacker" or the like by a liquid crystal display or voice at the timing when the game ball can be inserted into the specific winning opening 65a. The time interval between the timing of the notification and the timing at which the game ball can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a generally changes depending on the model. Therefore, when the timing from the notification to the actual entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a is long, the timing at which the game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a even though the game ball is launched according to the notification. Since the specific winning opening 65a does not change to a state that allows the entry of the game ball, the game ball may pass by without being able to enter the specific winning opening 65a, which is a factor of the player's dissatisfaction. It was.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by confirming the timing at which the movable effect member 2360 starts operating toward the tilted state, the player can perform the moving upper lid member 332 instead of indirect notification such as a liquid crystal display or voice. As a direct notification of the operation of the member that is interlocked with the operation of the moving upper lid member 332 with a certain time lag, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the moving upper lid member 332 starts the operation before the moving upper lid member 332 starts the operation. Therefore, the player can start firing the game ball toward the specific winning opening 65a without hesitation with certainty of the timing at which the specific winning opening 65a allows the entering of the game ball.

Further, by grasping the timing at which the moving upper lid member 332 starts operating before the moving upper lid member 332 starts operating, the game ball is compared with the case where the game ball is launched after confirming the operation of the moving upper lid member 332. You can accelerate the timing of launching. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period from when the moving upper lid member 332 actually changes to the state where the game ball is allowed to pass until the game ball passes through the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being delayed.

As shown in FIG. 26A, a game ball is formed between the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 2360 due to a time difference between the operation of the moving upper lid member 332 and the operation of the movable effect member 2360. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball biting.

As shown in FIG. 26B, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 2333 is released at the second time point t2 (or the timing immediately before that), the state of the moving upper lid member 332 does not change, and only the movable effect member 2360 Changes in state. Specifically, the state change is started from the standing state to the tilted state, and the state change is executed to return to the standing state before the tilted state is reached. By performing such drive control, the state of the moving upper lid member 332 is maintained in the overhanging state (closed state) by a single driving device (solenoid 2333) (that is, the ball to the specific winning opening 65a). By operating the movable directing member 2360 (while preventing winning), the player's attention to the moving upper lid member 332 can be improved.

Here, since the movable effect member 2360 is a member that operates in association with the opening / closing operation of the movable upper lid member 332, by operating the movable effect member 2360, the movable upper lid member 332 also starts the operation for the player. You can have the expectation that you may.

As shown in FIG. 26 (c), when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 2333 is released at the third time point t3 (or the timing immediately before that), the change in the state of the moving upper lid member 332 is kept until the closing reference state. , The movable production member 2360 changes its state. Specifically, the state change is started from the standing state to the tilted state, and then the state change is executed to return to the standing state after becoming the tilted state. By performing such drive control, the state of the moving upper lid member 332 is maintained in the closed state (between the overhanging state and the closing reference state) with a single driving device (solenoid 2333) (that is, a specific prize is awarded). By operating the movable directing member 2360 (while preventing the ball from winning the mouth 65a), the player's attention to the moving upper lid member 332 can be improved.

Further, in the drive control shown in FIG. 26 (c), the operating width of the movable effect member 2360 is larger than that of the drive control shown in FIG. 26 (b) because the movable effect member 2360 reaches the tilted state. Compared with the drive control shown in b), it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the state change of the movable effect member 2360.

Here, since the movable effect member 2360 is a member that operates in association with the opening / closing operation of the movable upper lid member 332, by operating the movable effect member 2360, the movable upper lid member 332 also starts the operation for the player. You can have the expectation that you may.

As shown in FIGS. 26 (b) and 26 (c), the drive control for operating the movable effect member 2360 while maintaining the movable upper lid member 332 in the closed state is performed at various timings regardless of the presence or absence of the jackpot game. It is feasible.

For example, by executing the jackpot game once or multiple times during the opening time OP (before the start of the round game R) or the interval between rounds (after the end of the round game R and before the start of the next round game R). It is possible to give the player the impression that the moving upper lid member 332 is in an extra open state (for a long time and a large number of times).

Further, for example, in a jackpot game, the player can be notified of the timing of the open state by executing the game once or a plurality of times immediately before the timing of the next opening state. Note that this control is used when the specific winning openings 65a are arranged at two locations and each of them is provided with a member that opens and closes the specific winning openings 65a, such as the moving upper lid member 332. It is particularly effective because it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize which specific winning opening 65a will be opened next by visually recognizing the operation of. When this control is executed, the third symbol display device 81 executes a notification indicating the firing position of the sphere, such as "Aim at the A (or B) attacker", thereby performing a liquid crystal effect and an effect by the movable effect member 2360. Therefore, it is possible to indicate the launch position of the ball to the player in double.

Further, for example, it may be an example of an effect when the lottery of a special symbol is not selected. In this case, for example, in the third symbol display device 81, "a big hit when the attacker is released" is displayed, and if the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the control shown in FIG. 26A is started. If the lottery of the special symbol is missed, the control shown in FIG. 26 (b) or FIG. 26 (c) may be started. As a result, the attention to the moving upper lid member 332 as an attacker can be improved with a high probability, and the player's tension can be maintained until just before the moving upper lid member 332 is opened.

Further, for example, the operation when the lottery of the special symbol becomes a small hit may be the operation shown in FIG. 26 (b) or FIG. 26 (c). In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the moving upper lid member 332 and passing through the specific winning opening 65a in the small hit.

In addition, for example, a round-up effect (an effect of notifying that there is an additional jackpot round in the middle of the jackpot game. For example, when a jackpot of 8 rounds is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol, 4 rounds are started at the start of the jackpot game. In the jackpot game with "+4 rounds" etc. by the end of the jackpot game, and as a result, the jackpot of 8 rounds and the player are informed of the jackpot. "?" Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and among the already notified rounds, at the timing when the final round ends and the next round (the round that starts if there is an additional round) starts. If there is an additional round, the drive control of FIG. 26 (a) may be continued, and if there is no additional round, the drive control of FIG. 26 (b) or FIG. 26 (c) may be executed.

In this case, the operation of the movable effect member 2360 makes the player feel as if an additional round is to be started. Therefore, regardless of the presence or absence of the additional round, the round to be started if there is an additional round. Until the timing at which the round game R of the above may be started (for example, the timing at which the fifth round game R can be expected to start), the player's interest can be maintained while being improved.

In the present embodiment, the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) of the main control device, but the solenoid 2333 may also be driven and controlled by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device.

A flow mode of the game ball that has passed through the moving upper lid member 332 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 (a), 27 (b), 28 (a), and 28 (b). 27 (a) and 27 (b) are partial front views of the game board 13, and FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b) are partial front perspective views of the game board 13.

In addition, in FIGS. 27 (a) and 28 (a), the retracted state of the moving upper lid member 332 and the tilted state of the movable effect member 2360 are shown (see FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (b)), and FIG. 27 In (b) and 28 (b), the overhanging state of the moving upper lid member 332 and the standing state of the movable effect member 2360 are illustrated (see FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b)).

The state shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 28 (a) and the state shown in FIGS. 27 (b) and 28 (b) are alternately switched. Since the moving upper lid member 332 that opens and closes the specific winning opening 65a is configured to hold (roll) the game ball on the upper surface for a predetermined period in the closed state (overhanging state), the moving upper lid member 332 is opened. Immediately after the state changes to the state (evacuated state), the game ball on the moving upper lid member 332 often falls.

In the present embodiment, it takes an average of 1 second or more from riding on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 until the game ball is discharged to the outside (beyond the left and right ends) of the moving upper lid member 332. , The inclination and rebound coefficient of the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 is set. Therefore, in a state where the game ball is continuously fired, the period during which the game ball is on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 is extended. In other words, even when the opening time of the moving upper lid member 332 is short, the moving upper lid member 332 changes its state to the open state (evacuated state) so that the game ball can be easily directed to the specific winning opening 65a. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, when the game balls are fired at the shortest interval of 0.6 seconds, the game balls reach the moving upper lid member 332 at intervals of about 0.75 seconds as described above, so that the moving upper lid member first. The next game ball can reach the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 before the game ball reaching the upper surface of the 332 is discharged to the outside of the moving upper lid member 332. That is, it is possible to maintain a state in which one or more game balls are arranged on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332. Therefore, by changing the state of the moving upper lid member 332 to the open state (evacuated state), the game ball can be easily directed to the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, the gap vertically below the light irradiation device 311b and vertically above the moving upper lid member 332 is configured as a gap through which the game ball cannot enter (it is said to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball). Therefore, the game ball rides on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 at a position outside the left and right ends of the light irradiation device 311b, and rolls on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332.

Therefore, when the game ball falls due to the moving upper lid member 332 being opened (retracted state) after the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 is rolled outward for a while, the game ball is then movable. After rolling inward in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the effect member 2360 and the upper surface of the extended floor portion 2331e, the sensor S passes through the sensor S. That is, since the path of the game ball to the sensor S detours to the left and right, the period until the game ball passes through the sensor S can be maintained for a long time.

When the game ball is on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 in the state shown in FIG. 28 (a), the state is switched to the state shown in FIG. 28 (b) (excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 is released, FIG. In the case of 26 (a)), as the movable production member 2360 operates, the game ball resting on the upper surface of the movable production member 2360 is lifted. In addition, in FIG. 28A, the outer shape of the movable effect member 2360 in the middle of operation is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As the movable effect member 2360 stands up, the game ball resting on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 slides down between the movable effect member 2360 and the front plate member 2320 (the first path D1 or the recess). A third path that slides down the back side of the installation portion 2365 and falls downward, or faces the back side above the plate-shaped portion on the left and right sides of the recessed portion 2365 of the movable effect member 2360. It is pushed to the back side along the path D3 and gets on the extended floor portion 2331e.

The game ball pushed to the back side and flowed down to the extended floor portion 2331e side receives an upward load and jumps up toward the lower surface of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 of the moving upper lid member 332. Here, the plate-shaped portion 332a1 is configured to ascend and incline toward the center in the left-right direction as described above.

That is, the plate on the left and right outer sides of the recessed portion 2365 as compared with the first distance H1 between the plate-shaped portion 332a1 at the left and right side ends of the recessed portion 2365 and the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360. The second distance H2 between the shape portion 332a1 and the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 is set shorter.

Therefore, when the game ball collides with the plate-shaped portion 332a1, a reaction force acts toward the lower left and right inside where the sensor S is arranged, and the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction toward the sensor S. As a result, the period until the game ball passes through the sensor S can be shortened (the period can be halved) as compared with the case where the movable effect member 2360 is maintained in the tilted state.

In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the second distance H2 is set with a dimension equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball. That is, even if the moving upper lid member 332 is closed immediately after the game ball falls to the front side of the specific winning opening 65a near the left and right ends of the moving upper lid member 332, the operation of the moving upper lid member 332 becomes the game ball. It can be less likely to be disturbed.

The game ball on the extended floor portion 2331e flows down toward the lower passage 331b through the fourth path D4 along the inclination of the extended floor portion 2331e. In other words, it flows down toward the center position in the left-right direction of the specific winning opening 65a.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the movable effect member 2360 does not start operating from the tilted state before the moving upper lid member 332 starts operating from the retracted state (see FIG. 28A). Therefore, at least, while the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state and the game ball can pass through the front side of the moving upper lid member 332, the movable effect member 2360 is in a state where the game ball can be placed on the upper surface (tilted state). (See FIG. 28 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is arranged on the front side of the movable effect member 2360.

In the present embodiment, even when the game ball is arranged on the front side of the movable effect member 2360, the game ball passes between the recessed portion 2365 and the inner rail 61 to the lower passage 331b. Since it is possible to flow down (see path C2a in FIG. 28B), it is possible to prevent the game ball from staying on the front side of the movable effect member 2360.

Further, in the state immediately before the movable effect member 2360 starts operating from the tilted state (see FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b)), the distance between the moving upper lid member 332 and the front plate member 2320 is a game ball. It is considered to be less than the diameter of (closed standard state). That is, when the moving upper lid member 332 operates from the retracted state to the overhanging state, before the moving upper lid member 332 is arranged at a position where the game ball cannot pass through the front side of the moving upper lid member 332. Is maintained in a tilted state with the movable effect member 2360. Therefore, even when the game ball passes the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 after the moving upper lid member 332 starts operating toward the overhanging state, the game ball is arranged on the front side of the movable effect member 2360. It is possible to reduce the possibility that such a situation will occur.

In the present embodiment, before the moving upper lid member 332 starts operating from the overhanging state (see FIG. 28B) (before the moving upper lid member 332 separates from the front plate member 2320 to the extent that the game ball can pass through), the movable effect member 2360 Since the operation starts from the standing state to the tilted state, for example, the game ball flows down the front side of the movable effect member 2360 before the operation of the movable effect member 2360 starts, and between the movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61. It is possible to prevent the game balls from being pinched and giving a load to each other.

Here, when a game ball is sandwiched between the movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61 and a situation in which loads are applied to each other frequently occurs, fatigue is accumulated in the movable effect member 2360 due to the repeated load. The useful life of the movable effect member 2360 tends to be shortened. Therefore, in order to extend the service life, it is easy to arrange the movable effect member 2360 in an arrangement that does not generate a load. For example, the movable effect member 2360 may be arranged so that the distance between the lower surface of the movable effect member 2360 in the tilted state and the inner rail 61 is larger than the diameter of the game ball.

However, in this case, it is necessary to raise the arrangement of the moving upper lid member 332 as well as the movable effect member 2360. Therefore, the third symbol, which is one of the advantages associated with the arrangement of the specific winning opening 65a along the inner rail 61. The effect of lowering the lower end of the display area (or visual area) of the display device 81 is halved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by defining the operation timing of the movable effect member 2360 with respect to the movable upper lid member 332 from the structure (see FIGS. 22 to 25), between the movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61. Since the game balls are prevented from being caught in the game balls and exerting loads on each other, the distance between the lower surface of the tilted movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61 can be moved to a position smaller than the diameter of the game balls. Even when the effect member 2360 is arranged, the useful life of the movable effect member 2360 can be sufficiently secured.

As a result, even when the movable effect member 2360 is provided, the arrangement of the movable upper lid member 332 can be maintained downward, so that the lower end of the display area (or visual recognition area) of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered. The effect can be retained.

Further, in the state immediately after the movable effect member 2360 is changed from the upright state to the tilted state (see FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b)), the distance between the moving upper lid member 332 and the front plate member 2320 is a game. It is considered to be less than the diameter of the sphere (closed standard state). That is, when the moving upper lid member 332 operates from the overhanging state to the retracted state, before the moving upper lid member 332 is arranged at a position where the game ball can pass through the front side of the moving upper lid member 332. , The movable effect member 2360 is in an inclined state. As a result, even when the game ball passes the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 after the moving upper lid member 332 starts operating toward the retracted state, the game ball is arranged on the front side of the movable effect member 2360. It is possible to reduce the possibility that such a situation will occur.

Therefore, even when the movable effect member 2360 is provided, the arrangement of the movable upper lid member 332 can be maintained downward, so that the effect of lowering the lower end of the display area (or visual recognition area) of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered. Can be retained.

In the present embodiment, the step portions 2324a arranged on the left and right sides of the movable effect member 2360 prevent the game ball from flowing from the left and right toward the movable effect member 2360. As a result, the path of the game ball toward the movable effect member 2360 can be limited only in the vertical direction. Therefore, the movement of the movable upper lid member 332 arranged above the movable effect member 2360 and the operation of the movable effect member 2360 are supported. The durability of the movable effect member 2360 can be improved only by defining the relationship.

As shown in FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b), the game ball that has passed through the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 is guided to the lower passage 331b by two main routes and passes through the sensor S ( Detected).

Of the two routes, one is a route that passes through the third route D3 and the fourth route D4. When the movable effect member 2360 starts operating in the upright state when the game ball that can flow down along this path is on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360, the game ball on the upper surface is pushed to the back side. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to accelerate the timing at which the game ball passes through the sensor S as compared with the case where the game ball flows down only by its own weight (the period can be halved).

Of the two routes, the other route is a route through which the game ball flows into the lower passage 331b from the front side. The event that the game ball flows down on the other path is when the game ball on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 flows down through the first path D1 or the second path D2 and then reaches the front side of the lower passage 331b. This occurs at least in the case where the movable effect member 2360 does not get on the upper surface, but flows down the front side of the movable effect member 2360, passes through the path C2a, and reaches the front side of the lower passage 331b.

In the present embodiment, when the moving upper lid member 332 starts operating from the retracted state, the movable effect member 2360 maintains the tilted state, and the standing state is also set after the moving upper lid member 332 is in the overhanging state. (See FIG. 26A), an event occurs in which the movable effect member 2360 flows down the front side of the movable effect member 2360 without riding on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360, passes through the path C2a, and reaches the front side of the lower passage 331b. The possibility can be reduced.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, at the timing (see FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b)) when the movable effect member 2360 is given a load to operate from the tilted state to the upright state, the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable upper lid member 332 Since the gap between the front plate member 2320 and the game ball is smaller than the diameter of the game ball (closed reference state), most of the game balls that have passed the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 are directed toward the tilted movable effect member 2360. And flow down. Therefore, it is possible to extremely reduce the possibility that an event occurs in which the movable effect member 2360 flows down the front side of the movable effect member 2360 without riding on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 and reaches the front side of the lower passage 331b through the path C2a.

Whether or not the game ball flows down the upper surface of the extended floor portion 2331e is clearly different between the above-mentioned one route and the other route. That is, in the present embodiment, a path (one path) in which the game ball flows down the upper surface of the extended floor portion 2331e and passes through the sensor S, and a sensor in which the game ball does not flow down the upper surface of the extended floor portion 2331e. A route passing through S (the other route) is configured.

Here, although the above-mentioned one path and the game ball flowing down the other path are the same in that they finally pass through the sensor S, the flow path is clearly different, so that the flow path is changed to the flow path. Correspondingly, the flow speed of the game ball can be changed.

For example, in the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the extended floor portion 2331e with respect to the horizontal plane is designed to be smaller than the inclination angle of the inner rail 61 and the lower passage 331b with respect to the horizontal plane. Therefore, as compared with the game ball flowing down one path, the game ball flowing down the other path takes a shorter period of time from reaching the front side of the specific winning opening 65a to passing through the sensor S. (The period can be halved).

Since the flow of the game ball on the other path is likely to occur just before the movable effect member 2360 moves toward the upright state, in this case, the front surface of the specific winning opening 65a just before the moving upper lid member 332 is closed. The game ball that has reached the side can be quickly detected by the sensor S (it can be discharged to the rear of the specific winning opening 65a). Therefore, the first interval time Int1 between rounds in the jackpot game described later can be set short.

As shown in FIG. 28 (a), the axial end surface (the end surface arranged on the rear side of FIG. 28 (a)) of the recessed portion 2365 is set to the left and right end surfaces and surface positions of the lower passage 331b. Therefore, when the game ball flows downward on the second path D2 through the recessed portion 2365, it is prevented from colliding with the left and right end faces of the lower passage 331b from above and bouncing back. That is, it is possible to reduce the resistance of the game ball flowing down along the second path D2, and it is possible to shorten the period required for the sensor S to detect the game ball on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360.

The same applies even if the axial end face of the recessed portion 2365 is arranged closer to the center in the left-right direction than the left-right end faces of the lower passage 331b (even if the left-right width of the recessed portion 2365 is shortened symmetrically in the left-right center). It can be effective.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the substantially left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a changes depending on whether the movable effect member 2360 is in the tilted state or the standing state. The "substantial left-right width" refers to the left-right width of the opening through which the game ball can pass in the front-rear direction.

That is, in the tilted state of the movable effect member 2360 shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 28 (a), a substantially left-right width is formed with the same length as the left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a, while FIG. 27 (a) In the upright state of the movable effect member 2360 shown in b) and FIG. 28 (b), the left-right width of the recessed portion 2365 (that is, the left-right width of the lower passage 331b) is substantially the left-right width.

As shown in FIGS. 27 (a), 27 (b), 28 (a) and 28 (b), the substantial left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a changes depending on the state of the movable effect member 2360. , The impression of the player who visually recognizes the specific winning opening 65a changes.

Here, when the player visually recognizes the specific winning opening 65a, he or she sees it from the front through the light-transmitting front plate member 2320 (see FIG. 27), or when the non-transparent moving upper lid member 332 retracts, the moving upper lid member 332 There are two possible ways to see it from above.

In the case of the front view, if only the moving upper lid member 332 is used, the shape of the moving upper lid member 332 does not change even if the state of the moving upper lid member 332 changes, so that the difference is difficult to understand. Since the movable effect member 2360, which is visually recognized larger than 332, changes the substantial left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a and the change in the front view design is clearly visible, the specific winning opening 65a opens. The difference between closed and closed can be impressively recognized by the player (easily identifiable).

Further, when viewed from above, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the overhanging state, the movable effect member 2360 is also difficult to see, and it is clear that the substantially left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a is narrow (in the left-right width of the lower passage 331b). Limited, see FIG. 28 (b)). On the other hand, when the moving upper lid member 332 is retracted, it is obvious that the movable effect member 2360, which is visually recognized larger than the moving upper lid member 332, is tilted and the specific winning opening 65a is greatly opened. The difference in opening and closing of the winning opening 65a can be impressively recognized by the player, and it can be easily identified that the game ball can be inserted into the specific winning opening 65a (FIG. 28 (a)). reference).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 28 (a), when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state and the movable effect member 2360 is in the tilted state, the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a Since the width is substantially the same as the left-right width, it is possible to reduce the flow resistance of the game ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, in addition to the fact that at least two flow paths of the game ball are configured, the flow speed of the game ball flowing down in each flow path (the period required for detection by the sensor S) is configured to be deviated. Therefore, even when a large number of game balls flow into the front side of the specific winning opening 65a in a short time, the degree to which the game balls stay can be reduced. As a result, the period until the game ball passing through the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 is detected by the sensor S can be kept short, so that excessive occurrence of over-winning can be suppressed.

The over-winning is, for example, "an event in which the game ball passes the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 in excess of the maximum number of passages planned while the moving upper lid member 332 maintains the retracted state". Point to that. Since the number of game balls detected by the sensor S is the same as the number of game balls passing through the front side of the moving upper lid member 332, when an over-winning occurs, the number of game balls detected by the sensor S is naturally "planned". It exceeds the maximum number of passing passes.

Over-winning, in other words, means that more prize balls are paid out to the player than the planned number of prize balls, so that the player can get more profit, but over-winning is frequent. If it becomes possible to generate the ball, there is a possibility that the game can be played far from the planned playability (ball ejection performance). Therefore, from the perspective of fairness, it is desirable that over-winning be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 27 (b) and 28 (b), when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the overhanging state and the movable effect member 2360 is in the standing state, the specific winning opening 65a The substantial left-right width is narrowed to the left-right width of the recessed portion 2365.

As a result, by limiting the flow path of the game ball flowing down the front side of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to increase the flow resistance when a plurality of game balls enter the front side of the specific winning opening 65a. .. That is, it is possible to extend the period required for the plurality of game balls to pass through the specific winning opening 65a and to hold the game balls on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a.

More specifically, the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state by making the first-entered game ball function as an obstacle to the flow of the trailing game ball, instead of slowing down the flow-down speed of the first-entered game ball. It is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from passing through the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 even though the operation has started from the overhanging state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of over-winning.

From the above, in the present embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is configured so that the substantially left-right width changes, so that the game ball that becomes the over-winning is the sensor in a double sense, that is, first. In the sense that the period until it is detected by S is shortened, secondly, when there are a plurality of game balls that are over-winning, the game ball that is entered first interferes with the following game ball. In the sense of preventing winning, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of over-winning.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the moving upper lid member 332 starts operating from the retracted state to the overhanging state due to the release of the excitation (driving) of the solenoid 2333, the second transmission member 2350 and the movable effect member 2360 are not in contact with each other. bottom. As a result, while adopting a configuration in which the movable effect member 2360 is operated by the driving force of the solenoid 2333, the operation of the moving upper lid member 332 from the retracted state to the overhanging state is started from the release timing of the excitation (driving) of the solenoid 2333. It is possible to prevent delay.

A movable effect member 2360, which makes it easier for the player to visually recognize a state change due to movement than the movable upper lid member 332, is arranged on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a, and the movable upper lid member 332 is a movable effect member beyond the period during which the movable upper lid member 332 maintains the retracted state. The 2360 is configured to maintain the tilted state. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game ball easily enters the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, since the movable upper lid member 332 is maintained in the retracted state during the period when the movable upper lid member 2360 is in the tilted state, the movable upper lid member 332 does not have to be directly visually recognized (even if it is difficult to visually recognize the movable upper lid member 332). By confirming the state of 2360, it can be determined whether or not the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state.

Since the operation of the movable effect member 2360 and the operation of the movable upper lid member 332 occur with a certain time lag, the effect of the third symbol display device 81 or the like that is not physically (mechanically) interlocked with the movable upper lid member 332. Compared with the case where the player is made to grasp the opening timing of the specific winning opening 65a by relying on the above, the operation of the movable effect member 2360 can be noticed as reliable information. This eliminates the player's dissatisfaction that he does not know when to launch the game ball because the time difference between the time when "Aim for the attacker" is displayed and the time when the specific winning opening 65a is actually opened is unknown. can do.

Further, although not shown in the present embodiment, the light path E1 (see FIG. 11A) intersects the above-mentioned light irradiation unit 331c1 (see FIG. 10B) with the movable effect member 2360. It may be arranged at the position and the timing of turning on and off the light irradiation unit 331c1 may be controlled according to the operation timing of the movable effect member 2360.

In this case, since the movable effect member 2360 is irradiated with light (light is emitted) from the light irradiation unit 331c1 at the same time as the tilting operation of the movable effect member 2360, the attention of the movable effect member 2360 can be improved. In addition, as described above, since the timing of the tilting operation of the movable effect member 2360 is before the timing when the moving upper lid member 332 is opened, it is before the ball can pass through the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to improve the attention of the player.

The timing of turning on and off the light irradiation unit 331c1 may be matched with the operation timing of the moving upper lid member 332, or may be set between the tilting timing of the movable effect member 2360 and the operation timing of the moving upper lid member 332. You may. In this case, since the light irradiation unit 331c1 irradiates light after the movable effect member 2360 starts the tilting operation, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the movable effect member 2360 is in the tilted state.

While the game ball can pass through the front side of the moving upper lid member 332, the movable effect member 2360 is maintained in the tilted state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is arranged on the front side of the movable effect member 2360. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball enters between the surface of the main body plate portion 2361 of the movable effect member 2360 that is arranged to face the inner rail 61 and the inner rail 61 and causes a load on each other.

Before the moving upper lid member 332 starts operating from the overhanging state, the movable effect member 2360 is configured to start operating toward the tilted state. As a result, the game ball is arranged on the front side of the movable effect member 2360 before the operation of the movable effect member 2360 is started, and the game ball is sandwiched between the movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61 to give a load to each other. It can be less likely to occur. Further, since the distance between the movable effect member 2360 and the inner rail 61 can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the arrangement of the moving upper lid member 332 can be maintained downward, and as a result, the third symbol The lower end of the display area of the display device 81 can be lowered.

Since the game ball that has fallen on the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 is configured to bounce upward by the movable effect member 2360, the period during which the game ball can be confirmed from the player's line of sight can be extended. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of missing the game ball that has fallen on the front side of the moving upper lid member 332.

Further, since the upward bounce becomes large when the movable effect member 2360 operates toward the upright state, the movable upper lid member is particularly close to the operation of the movable effect member 2360 (just before the movable upper lid member 332 is closed). It is possible to reduce the possibility of missing the game ball that has fallen on the front side of the 332.

When the game ball that collides with the movable effect member 2360 and bounces off the moving upper lid member 332 collides with the moving upper lid member 332, a reaction force is applied in the direction toward the sensor S. As a result, the period required for the game ball to reach the sensor S can be shortened.

The game ball that has passed through the moving upper lid member 332 is configured to flow down toward the sensor S in two clearly distinguishable paths. As a result, even when a large number of game balls flow into the front side of the specific winning opening 65a in a short time, the degree to which the game balls stay can be reduced (the time to stay can be shortened, and the smoothness is achieved. Can be flushed to).

The substantial (left and right) width of the specific winning opening 65a through which the game ball passing through the moving upper lid member 332 passes is configured to be changeable as the state of the moving upper lid member 332 changes. As a result, depending on whether the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state or the overhanging state, the flow resistance when the game ball arranged on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a passes through the specific winning opening 65a is reduced. Can be changed.

Specifically, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state and the game ball is allowed to pass, the substantially (left and right) width of the specific winning opening 65a is kept long, and the moving upper lid member 332 is in the overhanging state. In the case of restricting the passage of the game ball, the actual (left and right) width of the specific winning opening 65a is shortened. As a result, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state, the flow resistance when the game ball passing through the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 passes through the specific winning opening 65a can be reduced, and the moving upper lid member 332 changes to the overhanging state. Since the flow resistance when the game ball passing through the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 passes through the specific winning opening 65a can be increased, the occurrence of over winning can be suppressed (extra as over winning). The number of game balls that win a prize can be reduced).

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 33. In the second embodiment, the case where all the game balls on the movable effect member 2360 pass through the sensor S arranged on the back side of the lower passage 331b has been described, but the board surface lower unit 3300 in the third embodiment has been described. The game ball that has passed through the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 is arranged on the left side of the front view of the game ball that passes through the sensor S by the movable effect member 3360 and the specific winning opening 65a, and is a second sensor that detects the passage of the game ball. It is distributed to the game ball passing through S2. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 29 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13 according to the third embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 29, the retracted state of the moving upper lid member 332 and the tilted state of the movable effect member 3360 are shown. Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the game board 13 is shown in a simplified manner. Since the mechanism for driving the movable effect member 3360 is the same as the first transmission member 2340 and the second transmission member 2350 (see FIGS. 18 and 19) described above in the second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 29, the board surface lower unit 3300 in the third embodiment differs from the board surface lower unit 2300 described above in the second embodiment mainly in the following points. That is, first, the movable effect member 3360 is integrally provided with a distribution unit 3370 that distributes the flow path of the game ball. Secondly, a second sensor S2 is provided on the upstream side of the sensor S, and the second sensor S2 is configured to be able to detect a game ball distributed to the side not facing the sensor S by the distribution unit 3370. The difference is that the guide inclined surface 3331k that guides the game ball that has passed through the second sensor S2 is formed on the extended floor portion 2331e on the left side, and the V winning sensor VC is arranged downstream thereof. Hereinafter, they will be described in order. First, the distribution portion 3370 of the movable effect member 3360 will be described with reference to FIG.

30 (a) is a front perspective view of the movable effect member 3360 in a tilted state, and FIG. 30 (b) is a side view of the movable effect member 3360 in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 30 (a). 30 (c) is a top view of the movable effect member 3360 in the direction of arrow XXXc of FIG. 30 (a), and FIG. 30 (d) is a movable effect of the upright state in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 30 (a). It is a side view of the member 3360.

For ease of understanding, FIGS. 30 (b), 30 (c) and 30 (d) show the second sensor S2, the V winning sensor VC, the extended floor portion 2331e, and the guide in the assembled state. The game balls allocated to the inclined surface 3331k and the path on the side not facing the sensor S are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) to 30 (d), the distribution portion 3370 is a rod-shaped portion integrally formed with the movable effect member 3360, and the main body is formed from the rotation base end side end portion of the main body plate portion 2361. The extension rod portion 3371 extending along the lateral width direction of the plate portion 2361, and the main body plate portion 2361 along an arc centered on the support shaft portion 2362 from the extension end portion of the extension rod portion 3371. The extension arc portion 3372 extending in the direction in which the upper surface of the It mainly includes 3373 and a second regulating portion 3374 extending parallel to the support shaft portion from the extending tip side portion of the extending arc portion 3372.

As shown in FIGS. 30 (b) and 30 (d), the distribution unit 3370 is constantly formed on the movable effect member 3360, and when the movable effect member 3360 is in the upright state, the distribution unit 3370 extends. It is stored below the floor portion 2331e. In the present embodiment, an interference avoidance recess 3331l for the purpose of avoiding interference with the distribution portion 3370 is provided downward from the extended floor portion 2331e. That is, the interference avoidance recess 3331l is formed as a recess having a shape that includes at least the operation locus of the distribution portion 3370.

The game ball that passes through the extended floor portion 2331e to the left and right passes over the interference avoidance recess 3331l (see FIG. 29 (a)), but in the present embodiment, the extended rod portion 3371 has a small diameter (diameter). Since it has a rod shape of about 2 [mm]), the groove width of the interference avoidance recess 3331l at the place where the game ball passes above can be shortened. That is, by setting the groove width to about 2.5 [mm], the degree to which the game ball (diameter 11 [mm]) is caught in the interference avoidance recess 3331l and the game ball is decelerated can be reduced. Therefore, the game ball can be smoothly rolled on the upper surface of the extended floor portion 2331e.

The extension rod portion 3371 is arranged below the extension floor portion 2331e and the guide inclined surface 3331k regardless of the posture of the movable effect member 3360. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the extension rod portion 3371 from coming into direct contact with the game ball. The extension rod portion 3371 is arranged at a position separated from the left end of the specific winning opening 65a by at least the diameter (11 [mm]) of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can be arranged on the left side of the extension rod portion 3371.

Since the extended arc portion 3372 has an arc shape centered on the support shaft portion 2362, it is formed from a predetermined arc shape centered on the support shaft portion 2362 even when the posture of the movable effect member 2360 changes. Will be done. Therefore, the operation loci when the extended arc portion 3372 rotates can be overlapped, so that the design can be facilitated.

The first regulation unit 3373 is a portion that regulates the flow of the game ball that has entered the second sensor S2 to the right by flowing down the left side of the extension rod portion 3371 toward the back side, and the tip portion thereof. The surface shape of the left surface in the above is a plane orthogonal to the left-right axis. Therefore, since the load applied from the game ball to the first regulation unit 3373 faces the axial direction of the movable effect member 3360, the movable effect member 3360 is applied by the load applied from the game ball to the first regulation unit 3373. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a load in the rotational direction of.

The position of the center of gravity of the movable effect member 3360 is designed to be on the front side of the rotation axis and not to rise to the extent that the game ball collides with the first regulating portion 3373 from the front side. Therefore, during the winning of the game ball, the movable effect member 3360 can easily maintain the tilted state.

The second regulation unit 3374 is arranged above the center of the game ball in the tilted state of the movable effect member 3360, abuts on the back side of the game ball detected by the second sensor S2, and stops the flow of the game ball. (See FIG. 30 (b)).

Therefore, the load (own weight, etc.) applied to the second regulation unit 3374 from the stopped game ball is in the direction of raising the second regulation unit 3374, that is, in the direction in which the movable effect member 3360 is to be maintained in the tilted state (the direction in which the movable effect member 3360 is to be maintained in the tilted state. Turn to the left (clockwise). Therefore, not only the movable effect member 3360 is prevented from rising from the tilted state due to the load applied from the game ball, but also the load of the game ball is applied so that the movable effect member 3360 can easily maintain the tilted state. Can be done.

On the other hand, when the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 26) is released and the movable effect member 3360 operates toward the upright state, the second regulating unit 3374 is set. Since it moves in the direction away from the game ball (the direction toward the back side along the circle centered on the support shaft portion 2362), the load from the game ball interferes with the movement of the movable effect member 3360 to the upright state. Can be avoided.

Therefore, when the game ball is stopped at the second sensor S2 and the state of the movable effect member 3360 is intentionally changed while utilizing the weight of the game ball to maintain the state of the movable effect member 3360, the game is played. It is possible to prevent the weight of the sphere from interfering with the state change of the movable effect member 3360.

The front shape of the second regulating portion 3374 may be formed so that the normal of the point in contact with the game ball in the tilted state of the movable effect member 3360 faces the radial direction of the support shaft portion 2362. In this case, since the direction of the load applied from the game ball to the second regulating portion 3374 can be the radial direction of the support shaft portion 2362, the load is applied to the rotation direction of the movable effect member 3360 via the game ball. It can be prevented from being damaged.

In the present embodiment, the second sensor S2 is arranged at a position where the game ball whose flow is restricted by the second regulation unit 3374 is already detected and the game ball is stopped without passing through (FIG. 30 (FIG. 30). b) and FIG. 30 (c)). That is, the second regulation unit 3374 stops the game ball after (at least a part of) the game ball has entered the downstream side of the second sensor S2.

Therefore, the action of the distribution unit 3370 affects (extends or shortens) the period required from the opening state (retracted state) of the moving upper lid member 332 to the detection of the game ball by the second sensor S2. It can be prevented.

When the state of the movable effect member 3360 changes from the tilted state to the standing state, as described above, the distribution portion 3370 is housed below the guide inclined surface 3331k, so that the game ball whose flow is restricted (FIG. 30 (FIG. 30). (Refer to b)), the regulation is lifted and the game ball can flow down along the guide inclined surface 3331k, and the game ball that has flowed down is detected by the V winning sensor VC arranged downstream of the second sensor S2 (FIG. 30 (FIG. 30). d) See). Next, with reference to FIG. 31, an example of the flow-down mode of the game ball that has passed the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 (see FIG. 29) will be described.

31 (a) to 31 (c) are schematic top views schematically showing a movable effect member 3360, a distribution portion 3370, an extended floor portion 2331e, and a guide inclined surface 3331k. In addition, in FIGS. 31A to 31C, the process in which the game ball passes through the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 15) is illustrated in chronological order. That is, in FIG. 31 (a), the movable effect member 3360 is tilted and the first game ball P1 is on the upper surface of the movable effect member 3360. In FIG. 31 (c), the planned number of game balls (“specified number” described later) is the state in which the second game ball P2 enters from the state and rides on the upper surface of the movable effect member 3360. Is detected by the sensor S and the second sensor S2, and the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 26 (a)) is released, so that the state of the movable effect member 3360 changes from the tilted state to the standing state. The state immediately after the operation is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 31 (a), the first game ball P1 can flow down on the second path D2 or the third path D3. When flowing down on the second path D2, the game ball P1 passes through the lower passage 331b and is detected by the sensor S. In this case, the game ball collides with the first regulating portion 3373 protruding to the front side of the second sensor S2, or flows down to the lower passage 331b side without colliding.

On the other hand, when the game ball P1 flows down on the third path D3, the game ball P1 is restricted from flowing to the right by the first regulation unit 3373 or the second sensor S2 of the distribution unit 3370, and flows down to the back side by the second regulation unit 3374. By restricting the flow of the sensor S2, the sensor stays inside the second sensor S2 (see FIG. 31 (b)).

When the game ball P1 is parked inside the second sensor S2 and then the game ball P2 passing through the specific winning opening 65a flows down along the third path D3, the game ball P2 becomes the game ball P1. After the collision, the flow path changes to the post-collision path D32.

The post-collision path D32 is a path extending from the intermediate position of the third path D3 to the lower passage 331b side. That is, after one game ball is stopped on the guide inclined surface 3331k, it is detected by the sensor S exclusively through the lower passage 331b. In the present embodiment, the first regulation unit 3373 is only extended to the vicinity of the center position of the game ball P1 and does not extend to the front side of the game ball P1, so that the flow path of the game ball P2 Can be naturally (smaller in resistance) switched to the post-collision path D32.

In FIG. 31B, for convenience, the case where the game ball P1 which is the first ball is stopped inside the second sensor S2 is shown, but the game ball which is stopped inside the second sensor S2 is shown. It does not have to be the first game ball. For example, when the fifth game ball stays inside the second sensor S2, the sixth and subsequent game balls can exclusively pass through the post-collision path D32.

Further, since the game ball passing through the path D32 after the collision passes the front side of the game ball stopped inside the second sensor S2, the game ball stopped inside the second sensor S2 is visually recognized from the player's point of view. It acts to make the sex worse. Therefore, the game ball that flows down the path D32 after the collision makes it difficult to see the game ball that stays inside the second sensor S2, so that the game ball that stays inside the second sensor S2 can be visually recognized. While maintaining the collision, the game ball flowing down the path D32 after the collision can be made to act as a dazzle, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the game ball is stopped inside the second sensor S2.

As shown in FIG. 31 (c), when the movable effect member 3360 changes to the upright state, the game ball P1 staying inside the second sensor S2 flows down to the back side along the inclination of the guide inclined surface 3331k. , V is detected by the winning sensor VC. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 26A) is excited (driven), and the game ball reaches the front side of the specific winning opening 65a immediately after the movable effect member 3360 is tilted. However, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the V winning sensor VC is detected soon.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31B, the distance between the second sensor S2 and the V winning sensor VC is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball can flow down directly from the second sensor S2 to the V winning sensor VC, and it is possible to prevent the game ball that has passed through the second sensor S2 from flowing down the V winning sensor VC.

An example of playability that can be realized by using the configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 32.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing timekeeping changes in the outputs of the moving upper lid member 332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 3360, the sensor S, the second sensor S2, the regulation valve VB, and the V winning sensor VC in the first operation pattern. .. In the figures of the sensor S, the second sensor S2, and the V winning sensor VC, the ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball is detected. Further, the specified number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a refers to the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the second sensor S2.

The regulation valve VB is a virtual member that can switch between an open state that allows a game ball to enter the V winning sensor VC and a closed state that restricts the entry of a game ball into the V winning sensor VC. Illustrated in.

When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. Hereinafter, the operation control of the moving upper lid member 332 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

In the case of a predetermined jackpot game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 has a solenoid 2333 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to open the specific winning opening 65a. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be opened, so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

In the long-time operation of the moving upper lid member 332, the moving upper lid member 332 is brought into the closed state (overhanging state) when the scheduled closing operation time Ta (5 seconds) elapses, and after a predetermined time (1 second in the present embodiment) elapses. , The moving upper lid member 332 is set to the open state (retracted state) again.

The scheduled closing operation time Ta is longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a when the game balls are continuously fired, and a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls. Is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. ..

FIG. 32 illustrates an example of the passage mode of the game ball detected by the sensor S, the second sensor S2, and the V winning sensor VC when the game ball is continuously launched by the so-called “left-handed” described above. That is, in the present embodiment, when the left-handed game ball passes through the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 29), one game ball P1 may stay inside the second sensor S2. Other game balls (game ball P2, etc.) are detected by the sensor S.

The game ball parked inside the second sensor S2 passes through the second sensor S2 as the movable effect member 3360 changes to the upright state, and is detected by the V winning sensor VC (FIG. 31 (c)). reference). As described above, according to the present embodiment, the V winning sensor VC can be used without limiting the timing of entering the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a by opening the moving upper lid member 332 for a short time or the like. The timing at which the game ball P1 can pass can be limited from the start of the round game R to the elapse of the scheduled closing operation time Ta.

Therefore, for example, in order to prevent erroneous winning of the V winning sensor VC, which is generally seen in pachinko machines equipped with a V probability change attacker, control is performed to release the opening / closing plate for a short time at the start of the round game R (for the operation of the opening / closing plate). Control with unnaturalness) can be eliminated. As a result, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate for opening / closing the specific winning opening becomes a natural operation, and it is possible to provide the player with an environment in which he / she can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

That is, when the V winning sensor VC is arranged downstream of the second sensor S2 (only the game ball that has passed through the second sensor S2 can pass through the V winning sensor VC), the moving upper lid member at the start of the round game R It is possible to prevent erroneous winning of the V winning sensor VC without controlling the opening of the 332 for a short time.

Specifically, the regulation valve VB is arranged at a position downstream of the second sensor S2 and upstream of the V winning sensor VC. In the first operation pattern, the regulation valve VB is the time required for the game ball that has passed through the second sensor S2 to pass through the V winning sensor VC immediately after the lapse of the scheduled closing operation time Ta (0. It is maintained in the open state immediately after the start of the first round game R over the required transit time, which is the time exceeding the scheduled closing operation time Ta for 5 seconds), and is in the closed state as the required transit time elapses. Be changed.

As a result, in the present embodiment, in the situation where the game ball passes through the V winning sensor VC, the movable effect member 3360 is tilted when the scheduled closing operation time Ta elapses, and the game ball flows down beyond the second sensor S2. It can be limited to cases. That is, when the moving upper lid member 332 does not operate in the first operation pattern (for example, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) elapses or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls is won. When the moving upper lid member 332 does not change to the closed state), the V winning sensor VC can be configured so that the game ball does not pass through. In this case, the distance between the second sensor S2 and the V winning sensor VC is widened as compared with the above arrangement (see FIG. 31A), and the V winning is won when the regulation valve VB is closed. It is desirable that the sphere be configured to deviate from the sensor VC and flow down another flow path.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the V winning sensor VC during the jackpot, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is shifted to the probabilistic state of the special symbol. That is, in the present embodiment, the operation of the moving upper lid member 332 in the first operation pattern can be one condition in which the game state shifts to the probabilistic state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game.

Even in a configuration in which the distance between the second sensor S2 and the V winning sensor VC is less than the diameter of the sphere (see FIG. 31 (a)), the validity period of the V winning sensor VC is set during the round game R (during the big hit game). The same effect as described above can be obtained by setting the period (the period excluding the interval between rounds). That is, when the solenoid 2333 is driven in the first operation pattern, the ball can be detected by the V winning sensor VC during the round game R (while the regulation valve VB is open in FIG. 32), while the first When the moving upper lid member 332 does not operate in the operation pattern of 1 and is opened for a long time (for example, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) elapses or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of the game balls is won. When the moving upper lid member 332 does not change to the closed state until the above occurs), the timing at which the ball is detected by the V winning sensor VC is the inter-round interval period. Therefore, it is possible to set that the solenoid 2333 is driven by the first operation pattern as one condition for the V winning sensor VC to detect the sphere during the valid period.

In the present embodiment, the V winning sensor VC is arranged downstream of the second sensor S2, so that when the player continues to shoot the game ball by so-called "right-handed", the game ball becomes the first. The possibility of passing through the two sensors S2 and the possibility of passing through the V winning sensor VC are extremely low (the possibility of so-called "puncture" is high).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, during the period of the round game R in which the game ball is controlled so that the game ball can pass through the V winning sensor VC, or in the period before the round game R, the player is "left-handed" to play the game. The notification for urging the ball to be launched (left-handed navigation described above) is executed by the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227, or the like (see FIG. 4). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the opportunity to win the V winning sensor VC without noticing it.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means has the solenoid 2333 to hold the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state (overhanging state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is opened from the closed state (overhanging state) (overhanging state). The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced to the retracted state) and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15 rounds is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round game Rs, and the moving upper lid member 332 is closed (overhanging state). ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. It is controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

In the present embodiment, the moving upper lid member 332 is controlled to open and close during the round game R so that the game ball can be detected by the second sensor S2 in the round game R, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the moving upper lid member 332 may be controlled to be maintained in the open state (retracted state) during the first operating time T1. In this case, the timing at which the game ball is detected by the V winning sensor VC is limited to the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball that passes through the specific winning opening 65a after the game ball P1 stays inside the second sensor S2 is exclusively detected by the sensor S. As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (c), since the second sensor S2 is arranged closer to the movable effect member 3360 than the sensor S, the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 15). ), The game ball arranged on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a is detected by the sensor S as compared with the period required for the game ball arranged on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a to be detected by the second sensor S2. The time required is longer.

Therefore, by continuing to fire the game ball with a left-handed hit, the prize ball is represented by the case where the first game ball is detected by the second sensor S2 as compared with the case of firing with a right-handed hit. You can speed up the payout timing. On the other hand, since the sensor that detects the specified number of game balls (10th ball in the present embodiment) can be limited to the sensor S with a high probability, the specified number of game balls enters the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to secure a long period from the time when the test is performed until the actual detection is performed.

That is, at the beginning of the round game R, the detection of the game ball is performed earlier to advance the timing of the payout start, and at the end of the round game R, the detection of the game ball is delayed to slightly over-win. It can be easily generated.

The second sensor S2 may be arranged at the position of the V winning sensor VC described above. That is, the second sensor S2 may be arranged behind the second regulation unit 3374. In this case, when the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 is released by the end of the round game R and the movable effect member 3360 is in the upright state, the game ball (still the second sensor S2) stopped on the front side of the second sensor S2. A game ball that has not been detected in the second sensor S2) will be detected by the second sensor S2. Therefore, when the second sensor S2 controls to pay out the prize balls each time it detects a game ball, a specified number of balls have been entered into the specific winning opening 65a in the round game R, and the moving upper lid member 332 is closed. Since the game ball parked on the front side of the second sensor S2 is detected after the (overhanging state) is set, over-winning occurs frequently after the end of each round game R. become.

In this case, if it is desired to suppress the occurrence of over-prize, the second sensor S2 is adopted as a mere entry port, and the prize ball is not paid out even if it passes through the second sensor S2, and the provisions relating to the round game R are provided. The number may be detected only by the sensor S. On the other hand, in this case, since the number of passing through the moving upper lid member 332 and the number of winnings do not match, it may be difficult for the player to measure the timing at which the launch of the game ball is stopped.

Further, another link mechanism may be used so that the movable effect member 2360 maintains the upright state after the scheduled closing operation time Ta has elapsed. In this case, after the end of the round game R, the game ball stopped by the second regulation unit 3374 is detected by the second sensor S2, so that it is possible to prevent the over-winning from occurring frequently. The two-sensor S2 can be adopted as a detection sensor with a prize ball. As a result, since the number of passing through the moving upper lid member 332 and the number of winnings match, it is possible to easily measure the timing at which the player stops firing the game ball.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the second sensor S2 is arranged at the left end of the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 29), so that the upper surface is rolled along the inclination of the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 and left. A game ball that flows down with a velocity component toward the direction can be more easily directed to the second sensor S2 than a game ball that falls without riding on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 (third). It can be easily flowed down by the route D3). That is, in the jackpot game, the game ball that reaches the moving upper lid member 332 during the first interval time Int1 between rounds is second compared to the game ball that reaches the front side of the moving upper lid member 332 during the round game R. It becomes easier to go to the sensor S2.

Therefore, if the game ball is continuously fired during the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the game ball is more likely to pass through the second sensor S2, and the game ball is more likely to pass through the V winning sensor VC. This suppresses the player from stopping the interval between intervals (that is, stopping the firing at the first interval time Int1 between rounds, etc.) for the purpose of gaining the benefit of the game ball passing through the V winning sensor VC. be able to.

With reference to FIG. 33, the correspondence between the first hit type counter C4 in the third embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol will be described. FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C4 in the third embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 33, the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14B) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the first hit type counter C4. Judgment values are defined in association with each jackpot type and the type of winning opening that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C4 is selected.

In addition, a part of the jackpot type defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C4 when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 640). Is the same as that described in the first embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted. Hereinafter, the jackpot type newly defined in the present embodiment will be described.

Specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first winning opening 64), the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 19". Is defined with the jackpot D associated with it (see 202b21 in FIG. 33).

When the jackpot D is reached, a 10-round jackpot game is executed in the first operation pattern of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 3360. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 1500 prize balls.

The jackpot E is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C4 is "20 to 49" (see 202b22 in FIG. 33).

When the jackpot E is obtained, the jackpot game of 6 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 3360. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 900 prize balls.

The jackpot F is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C4 is "50 to 99" (see 202b23 in FIG. 33).

When the jackpot F is obtained, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 3360. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 600 prize balls.

As described above, when a big hit is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first winning opening 64), the difference in the number of prize balls paid out by the player appears as the difference in the number of rounds, and the rounds. As the number increases, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases, and the time required for the jackpot game also increases.

In the jackpot based on the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first winning opening 64), there is a 20% chance of winning a 10-round jackpot, while a 50% chance of winning a 4-round jackpot. , Basically, you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, since the 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, it is possible to start launching the ball for the subsequent jackpot acquisition at an early stage.

According to the present embodiment, in the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1, the round game R of the first round is always executed in the first operation pattern. A game ball can be inserted into the VC. Therefore, regardless of the value of the first hit type counter C4, the game state after the end of the big hit game can be easily set to the probabilistic state of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 640), the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 79", which is a big hit. d is associated and defined (see 202b24 in FIG. 33).

When the jackpot d is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 3360. In this case, the player can receive a payout (maximum payout) of about 2250 prize balls.

As described above in the first embodiment, the jackpot b is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C4 in the range of "80 to 89" (see 202b5 in FIG. 14B).

If the jackpot b is reached, a 10-round jackpot game is executed. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 1500 prize balls.

As described above in the first embodiment, the value of the first hit type counter C4 is defined in the range of "90 to 99" in association with the jackpot c (see 202b6 in FIG. 14B).

When the jackpot c is reached, the jackpot game of 8 rounds is executed. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 1200 prize balls.

As described above, the jackpot generated by the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 640) has a probability of 80% jackpot d (maximum payout and 1 in the first operation pattern). It is a big hit in which the round game R of the roundth round is executed). Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of payouts expected when the lottery of the special symbol 2 is a big hit, as compared with the number of payouts expected when the lottery of the special symbol 1 is a big hit.

On the other hand, there is a 20% probability that the jackpot b or jackpot c will occur. In this case, the moving upper lid member 332 is closed (see FIG. Since the control to set the overhang state) is not performed, the timing at which the game ball passes through S2 is delayed, and there is a risk that the game state after the end of the jackpot game will be a low probability state of the special symbol.

Therefore, the profit obtained by the player changes greatly depending on whether it is a jackpot d, a jackpot b, or a jackpot c, so that the attention to which jackpot is selected in the special symbol 2 lottery is improved. It is possible to improve the interest of the player.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit is increased. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second winning opening 640, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be performed. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the probabilistic state of the special symbol, which is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol and is likely to be a big hit a (big hit of the maximum ball) when it becomes a big hit, is repeated. Since it becomes easier, it becomes easier for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

According to the present embodiment, the path of the game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a can be switched by the movable effect member 3360 that is interlocked with the moving upper lid member 332. In this case, the movable effect member 3360 can switch whether or not the game ball passes through the V winning sensor VC arranged downstream of the specific winning opening 65a.

The movable effect member 3360 stops the game ball in the tilted state, and in this case, the load applied from the game ball to the movable effect member 3360 is directed in the direction of maintaining the tilted state of the movable effect member 3360. On the other hand, when the movable effect member 3360 intentionally changes its state, the movable effect member 3360 moves in a direction away from the game ball. In this case, the load required to maintain the movable effect member 3360 in the tilted state can be reduced, and the load required to intentionally change the state of the movable effect member 3360 can also be reduced.

According to the present embodiment, the timing at which the game ball passes through the second sensor S2 arranged inside the specific winning opening 65a can be limited from the start of the round game R to the lapse of the scheduled closing operation time Ta. In this case, the V probability variation attacker can be easily configured without performing unnatural operation control for opening the moving upper lid member 332, which is the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a, for a short time.

According to the present embodiment, when the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the mode of launching the game ball to the specific winning opening 65a, the game ball is hit by a suitable hitting method (for example, left-handed or right-handed). You will be notified to fire. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. Here, when the profit obtained by the player changes, for example, the case where whether or not the player can obtain the opportunity to win the V winning sensor VC is exemplified.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 49. In the second embodiment and the third embodiment, the case where the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect members 2360 and 3360 are always interlocked has been described, but the board surface lower unit 4300 in the fourth embodiment operates the moving upper lid member 4332. On the other hand, it is possible to switch between the case where the movable effect member 4360 is interlocked and the case where the posture is maintained without moving. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 34 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 4330 according to the fourth embodiment in a line of sight looking up from below. In the variable winning device 4330, in comparison with the second embodiment and the third embodiment, the second sensor S2 is overlapped at the same position as the V winning sensor VC (the back side of the extended floor portion 2331e) and is stacked on both the left and right sides. The main differences are that they are arranged, that the shape of the moving upper lid member 4332 is different, that the switching device 4400 is provided, and that the shape of the movable effect member 4360 is matched to the switching device 4400. First, the shape of the moving upper lid member 4332 will be described.

35 is a front perspective view of the moving upper lid member 4332 in a line of sight looking up from below, FIG. 36 (a) is a front view of the moving upper lid member 4332, and FIG. 36 (b) is FIG. 36 (a). It is sectional drawing of the moving upper lid member 4332 in line XXXVIb-XXXVIb. In FIG. 36A, in order to facilitate understanding, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the main body plate portion 321 and the light irradiation device 311b are arranged in the assembled state (see FIG. 1). The outer shape is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the moving upper lid member 4332 has a pair of left and right sides protruding downward from the plate-shaped portion 332a1 in addition to the configuration of the moving upper lid member 332 described in the second embodiment and the third embodiment. Mainly includes a first projecting portion 4332e of the above, and a pair of left and right second projecting portions 4332f projecting downward from the plate-shaped portion 332a1 rearward and left and right outside of the first projecting portion 4332e.

In FIGS. 35 and 36 (b), the reference line RefL is illustrated. The reference line RefL is illustrated by an imaginary line as a straight line indicating the position of the plane including the front surface of the second sensor S2 when the moving upper lid member 4332 is in the retracted state (see FIG. 22). That is, in the retracted state of the moving upper lid member 4332, the first protruding portion 4332e of the moving upper lid member 4332 is arranged on the front side of the plane including the front surface of the second sensor S2, while the second protruding portion 4332f is the second sensor. It is arranged behind the plane including the front surface of S2. On the other hand, when the moving upper lid member 4332 is in the overhanging state (see FIG. 25), the second projecting portion 4332f is arranged on the front side of the plane including the front surface of the second sensor S2 beyond the second sensor S2. ..

The first protruding portion 4332e is a portion that protrudes to the left and right outside the vicinity of the left and right ends of the light irradiation device 311b in the assembled state, and the lower surface is formed as an inclined surface that ascends to the left and right outside. The front end surface is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined upward toward the front side and smoothly connects to the plate-shaped portion 332a1. Therefore, the game ball that has collided with the first projecting portion 4332e is suppressed from bouncing back to the front side even if it collides with the front end surface, and bounces outward to the left and right.

The formed portion of the first projecting portion 4332e is selectively concentrated on the portion where the game ball falls. That is, it is intentionally not formed in a place where the bounce of the game ball is unlikely to occur. As a result, the material cost due to the addition of the first projecting portion 4332e can be minimized.

The second protruding portion 4332f is a portion that protrudes to the left and right outside the vicinity of the left and right ends of the light irradiation device 311b in the assembled state, and the lower surface is formed as an inclined surface that ascends to the left and right inward. The front end surface is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined upward toward the front side and smoothly connects to the plate-shaped portion 332a1. Therefore, the game ball that has collided with the second projecting portion 4332f is suppressed from bouncing back to the front side even if it collides with the front end surface, and bounces inward to the left and right.

The inclination angle of the second projecting portion 4332f in the left-right direction is set to be larger than the inclination angle of the plate-shaped portion 332a1. Therefore, the case where the game ball collides with the lower surface of the second projecting portion 4332f makes it easier to direct the game ball toward the sensor S side as compared with the case where the game ball collides with the lower surface of the plate-shaped portion 332a1. be able to.

The formed portion of the second projecting portion 4332f is selectively concentrated on the portion where the game ball falls. That is, it is intentionally not formed in a place where the bounce of the game ball is unlikely to occur. As a result, the material cost due to the addition of the second projecting portion 4332f can be minimized.

With reference to FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b), a flow mode of the game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the movable effect member 4360 will be described. 37 (a) and 37 (b) are cross-sectional views of the variable winning device 4330 in the line corresponding to the XXI-XXI line of FIG. 20 (b). In addition, FIG. 37 (a) shows the retracted state of the moving upper lid member 4332 and the tilted state of the movable effect member 4360, and FIG. 37 (b) shows the overhanging state of the movable upper lid member 4332 and the standing state of the movable effect member 4360. The state is illustrated.

FIG. 37A shows an example of a flow-down mode in which a game ball that has been rolling on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 4332 in the overhanging state falls after the moving upper lid member 4332 moves toward the retracted state. Illustrated by an imaginary line, in FIG. 37B, when the game ball is rolling on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 4332 in the overhanging state, the moving upper lid member 4332 is opened for a short time (0.2 seconds). An example of the flow-down mode of the game ball when the moving upper lid member 4332 moves toward the retracted state and the game ball falls and the moving upper lid member 4332 is closed immediately after that is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b), after the game ball bounces on the upper surface of the movable effect member 4360, at least a part of the game ball is arranged above the lower bottom surface of the deformed through hole 331a. The arrangement and material (mainly the coefficient of restitution) of the movable effect member 4360 are set so that the movable effect member 4360 can collide with the first projecting portion 4332e or the second projecting portion 4332f.

As a result, the movement of the game ball that has fallen from the moving upper lid member 4332 can be made violent, so that the attention to the game ball can be improved.

Further, as compared with the case where the game ball flows down without bouncing back, the time required for the game ball to pass through the sensor S or the second sensor S2 after falling from the moving upper lid member 4332 can be lengthened. , So-called over-winning can easily occur.

As shown in FIG. 37 (a), when the moving upper lid member 4332 is maintained in the retracted state and the game ball bounced by the movable effect member 4360 collides with the moving upper lid member 4332, the game ball is the first projecting portion. Collision with 4332e. Therefore, the game ball is given a load along the arrow OD pointing to the left-right outer side and the downward direction, and bounces off the left-right outer side and the downward direction.

Therefore, in this case, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 34) passes through the second sensor S2.

As shown in FIG. 37 (b), as described above, since the time required for the game ball to be placed in the highest position after bouncing is 0.4 seconds, the moving upper lid member 4332 is released from the retracted state. When the moving upper lid member 4332 returns to the overhanging state in a short time (0.2 seconds), the moving upper lid member 4332 is brought into the overhanging state before the game ball bounced by the movable effect member 4360 collides with the moving upper lid member 4332. In this case, the game ball collides with the second projecting portion 4332f. Therefore, the game ball is given a load along the arrow ID pointing to the left-right inside and downward, and bounces back to the left-right inside and downward.

Therefore, in this case, the possibility that the game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 34) passes through the second sensor S2 can be reduced, and the possibility that the game ball has passed through the sensor S can be increased.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the moving upper lid member 4332 is maintained in the open state (retracted state) and the moving upper lid member 4332 is opened for a short time due to the shape of the moving upper lid member 4332 at the position where the game ball collides. The possibility (ratio) of the game ball passing through the sensor S2 can be changed depending on the case (0.2 seconds).

The first projecting portion 4332e is arranged in front of the point where the game ball that collides with the movable effect member 4360 and bounces collides with the moving upper lid member 4332 in the overhanging state (see FIG. 37 (b)). .. That is, when the moving upper lid member 4332 is opened for a short time (0.2 seconds), the game ball that falls from the moving upper lid member 4332 and collides with the movable effect member 4360 bounces before colliding with the moving upper lid member 4332. The moving upper lid member 4332 is in an overhanging state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the first projecting portion 4332e of the moving upper lid member 4332.

Next, the switching device 4400 added in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the switching device 4400. In the following description of the present embodiment, the mechanism for driving the movable effect member 4360 is the same as the first transmission member 2340 and the second transmission member 2350 (see FIGS. 18 and 19) described above in the second embodiment. Since there is, the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38, the switching device 4400 is connected to the front side of the main body front portion 2331F (see FIG. 18) below the transmission portion 2364 (see FIG. 18) arranged at the right end position of the movable effect member 4360. A device disposed inside the side wall F4a and the bottom wall F4b that maintains the posture of the rotating member 4410 by engaging with the rotating member 4410 that is rotatably supported by the shaft and the rotating member 4410. It mainly includes a maintenance member 4420 and a vertically moving member 4430 that is supported so as to be vertically movable above the rotating member 4410 and is raised by being pushed up by the rotating member 4410.

The rotating member 4410 extends in the axial direction in the axial direction along with the rotationally symmetric main body portion 4411 rotatably supported by a cylindrical rod fixed to the side wall F4a and the end surface of the main body portion 4411 on the side wall F4a side. A pair of extending portions 4412 and a load generating portion 4413 extending from the extending end portion of the extending portion 4412 to the side wall F4a side in a cylindrical shape are mainly provided.

On the peripheral surface of the main body portion 4411, an equally divided recessed portion 4411a which is periodically recessed in the same shape (90 degree cycle in the present embodiment) is formed. The equally divided recessed portion 4411a has a shape that matches the shape of the tip portion of the posture maintaining member 4420. In the present embodiment, since the tip portion of the posture maintaining member 4420 has a semicircular shape, the equally divided recessed portion 4411a has a semicircular shape whose outer shape overlaps with the semicircle of the tip portion of the posture maintaining member 4420.

The pair of extending portions 4412 and the pair of load generating portions 4413 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis of the rotating member 4410. That is, the pair of load generating units 4413 move following the same locus as the rotating member 4410 rotates.

The posture maintaining member 4420 is urged in the ascending direction (raising direction) by the urging force of the coil spring SP4a, and has a long plate-shaped main body portion 4421 rotatably supported by the bottom wall F4b and its main body portion 4421. Mainly includes an engaging portion 4422 that projects in a semicircular shape on the rotating member 4410 side at the end portion on the rotating tip side of the above.

As shown in FIG. 38, in the posture maintaining member 4420, the engaging portion 4422 is pressed against the equally divided recessed portion 4411a of the rotating member 4410 by the urging force of the coil spring SP4a. At this time, the movement locus of the most overhanging portion (intermediate portion of the circumference) of the engaging portion 4422 is configured to overlap with the circular orbit passing through the rotation axis of the rotating member 4410 around the rotation axis of the main body portion 4421. NS. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 38, the urging force of the coil spring SP4a does not give a load in the rotation direction to the rotating member 4410.

In this case, in the posture in which the equally divided recessed portion 4411a is fitted with the engaging portion 4422 (see FIG. 38, the same fitting is possible with a phase shift of 90 degrees), the rotating member 4410 is likely to shift in the rotation direction due to vibration or the like. Even if the position becomes higher, the engaging portion 4422 causes resistance to shift in posture, so that the posture of the rotating member 4410 is maintained. That is, as a general rule, the posture of the rotating member 4410 is maintained in the state of FIG. 38.

The vertical movement member 4430 is a member whose movement direction is restricted up and down by a pair of plate-shaped guide portions F4c formed inside the side wall F4a, and is a plate-shaped portion extending back and forth and downward by a coil spring SP4b. The urged main body 4431, the supported portion 4432 extending upward from the front end of the main body 4431 in a plate shape, and the clerk extending from the extending tip of the supported portion 4432 to the back side. It mainly includes a stop portion 4433.

The main body portion 4431 is arranged at a position overlapping the load generating portion 4413 in a top view, and as the load generating portion 4413 moves in a direction approaching the main body portion 4431, a load is applied from the load generating portion 4413 and the main body portion 4431 rises.

The main body portion 4431 includes a recessed portion 4431a that is recessed from the lower surface side upward in front of the axis of the rotating member 4410 in the assembled state.

The recessed portion 4431a is recessed with a front-rear width that allows the load generating portion 4413 of the rotating member 4410 to enter. The vertical line is used as a reference when the load generating portion 4413 of the rotating member 4410 abuts on the main body 4431 behind the rotating shaft and when it abuts on the main body 4431 in front of the rotating shaft due to the recessed portion 4431a. The vertical position of the vertical moving member 4430 can be changed when the absolute values of the rotational angles of the rotating member 4410 are the same. As a result, the function of maintaining the posture of the movable effect member 4360 is added to the vertical movement member 4430, which will be described in detail later.

The supported portion 4432 includes a covering portion 4432a that projects in the front-rear direction so as to cover the pair of guide portions F4c. When the vertically moving member 4430 is pushed downward by the urging force of the coil spring SP4b, the lower limit of its arrangement is a position where the covering portion 4432a and the guide portion F4c are in vertical contact with each other.

That is, in the present embodiment, the vertical movement member 4430 is maintained at a position (lower limit position) where the covering portion 4432a and the guide portion F4c are in contact with each other when the load generating portion 4413 is not in contact with the load generating portion 4413. By being pushed up, the load generating portion 4413 can be raised to the position (upper limit position) of the vertical movement member 4430 when it is arranged directly above the rotation axis.

The locking portion 4433 includes a protruding claw portion 4433a projecting downward from the front end portion on the back surface side. The protruding claw portion 4433a is arranged for the purpose of maintaining the posture of the movable effect member 4360 in an upright state, and the details will be described later.

Next, the operation of the switching device 4400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39 (a) to 39 (c) and 40 (a) to 40 (c) schematically show the operation of the switching device 4400, the first transmission member 2340, the second transmission member 2350, and the movable effect member 4360. It is a side schematic view of the switching device 4400, the first transmission member 2340, the second transmission member 2350, and the movable effect member 4360 shown in the above.

In FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (c) and 40 (a) to 40 (c), a state in which the rotating member 4410 makes a half rotation in the forward rotation direction is illustrated in chronological order. Note that FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (c) show a state in which a pair of load generating portions 4413 of the rotating member 4410 are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction, and FIGS. 39 (c) and 40 (a) show. , A state in which a pair of load generating portions 4413 of the rotating member 4410 are arranged side by side is illustrated.

In the present embodiment, the sliding portion 4363 of the movable effect member 4360 is slightly changed in shape from the sliding portion 2363 so as not to interfere with the extended rod-shaped portion 2353 of the second transmission member 2350. That is, the portion that is arranged to face the extended rod-shaped portion 2353 is cut in a direction away from the extended rod-shaped portion 2353.

In the present embodiment, the engaging claw Na, which is arranged on the first transmission member 2340 and moves up and down integrally, is configured to be able to apply a load in the rotational direction to the rotating member 4410. In the present embodiment, the engaging claw Na is extended in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotating member 4410, and is configured within the thickness range of the rotating member 4410 (between a plane orthogonal to the rotating axis of the rotating member 4410). (Inside the area to be).

When a load is applied from the bottom to the top, the engaging claw Na operates relative to the first transmission member 2340 and can release the load (the load transmission is released), while the upper part. When a load is applied downward from the position, the relative operation with respect to the first transmission member 2340 is disabled, and the load is pivotally supported by the first transmission member 2340 in a manner in which the load is transmitted.

More specifically, on the lower side of the engaging claw Na, a protrusion for preventing the engaging claw Na from tilting is projected from the side surface of the first transmission member 2340. As a result, the engagement claw Na is restricted from being displaced in the tilting direction from the sideways posture, and is allowed to be displaced in the rising direction.

That is, the engaging claw Na can apply a load toward the rotating member 4410 when moving in the direction of lifting the rotating member 4410, while the engaging claw Na can apply a load toward the rotating member 4410 when moving in the direction of pushing down the rotating member 4410. Cannot put a load on.

Therefore, when the first transmission member 2340 is raised (when the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) is driven (excited)), the rotating member 4410 can be rotated (FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (c)). ) On the other hand, when the first transmission member 2340 is lowered (when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 2333 is released), the posture of the rotating member 4410 is maintained (FIG. 39 (c)). And FIG. 40 (a)).

The protruding claw portion 4433a has a shape that maintains the movable effect member 4360 in the upright state by arranging the vertical movement member 4430 at the lower limit position when the movable effect member 4360 is in the upright state (see FIG. 39 (a)). Designed. That is, the protruding claw portion 4433a is configured such that the lower surface in contact with the locked portion 4637 is an inclined surface parallel to the inclination of the upper surface of the locked portion 4637 in the upright state of the movable effect member 4360 described later.

In addition to the configuration of the movable effect member 2360 in the second embodiment, the movable effect member 4360 includes a locking recessed portion 4366 recessed from the front side surface to the back side of the transmission unit 2364 and a locking recess thereof. It is provided with a locked portion 4637 extending upward from the lower end portion of the transmission portion 2364 so as to close the lower end portion of the installation portion 4366.

The locking recessed portion 4366 is recessed so as not to overlap with the movement locus of the vertical movement member 4430. That is, the vertical movement member 4430 can be moved up and down without changing the state of the movable effect member 4360 (while remaining in the standing state).

The locked portion 4637 is inclined so that the upper surface in contact with the protruding claw portion 4433a becomes closer to the rotation axis as it goes counterclockwise in the left side view (direction view in FIG. 39A). It is formed as a portion having an inclined surface. Therefore, if the protruding claw portion 4433a of the vertically moving member 4430 is caught by the locked portion 4637 even a little, the movable effect is produced by the load applied from the vertically moving member 4430 to the movable effect member 4360 via the locked portion 4637. The member 4360 can be rotated in the backward rotation direction.

In the present embodiment, since the urging force of the coil spring SP4b is sufficiently large, it is possible to prevent the vertically moving member 4430 from rising due to the load from the movable effect member 4360.

The action of the switching device 4400 having the above-described configuration on the movable effect member 4360 will be described. In FIG. 39 (a), the state in which the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) is released is shown, the moving upper lid member 4332 is in the closed state (overhanging state), and the second transmission member 2350 is released. The load causes the movable production member 4360 to stand upright, and in addition, the vertical movement member 4430 is arranged at the lower limit position.

In this case, the movable effect member 4360 is double-maintained from the second transmission member 2350 and the vertical movement member 4430. That is, the movable effect member 4360 does not change its posture only when either the second transmission member 2350 or the vertical movement member 4430 is retracted, and the movable effect member 4360 can be rotated toward the tilted state only when both are retracted.

When the solenoid 2333 is driven (excited) from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a), the state changes toward the state shown in FIG. 39 (b). In FIG. 39B, the first transmission member 2340 is placed at the upper limit position as the moving end of the vertical movement arranged after the solenoid 2333 is driven (excited), and after the solenoid 2333 is driven (excited). The state of being arranged at a position intermediate with the lower limit position of being arranged is illustrated.

In FIG. 39B, the load from the engaging claw Na is transmitted to the posture maintaining member 4420 via the rotating member 4410. That is, as the rotating member 4410 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the contact position between the rotating member 4410 and the posture maintaining member 4420 rotates, and the engaging portion 4422 of the posture maintaining member 4420 is attached with the coil spring SP4a. Pushed down in the opposite direction of the power. Then, the posture maintaining member 4420 is pushed out of the movement locus of the main body portion 4411 of the rotating member 4410, so that the rotating member 4410 can rotate.

In FIG. 39B, the extended rod-shaped portion 2353 of the second transmission member 2350 retracts above the transmission portion 2364 of the movable effect member 4360, while the vertical movement member 4430 is maintained at the lower limit position and becomes the vertical movement member 4430. By being locked, the posture change of the movable effect member 4360 is prevented. Therefore, the posture of the movable effect member 4360 is maintained in the upright state. On the other hand, the moving upper lid member 4332 starts moving toward the open state (retracted state).

When the first transmission member 2340 is further raised from the state shown in FIG. 39 (b), the rotating member 4410 rotates in the forward rotation direction, and the equally divided recessed portion 4411a facing forward in FIG. 39 (b) is lowered. Move to the side. In this case, the posture of the rotating member 4410 is maintained by arranging and fitting the equally divided recessed portion 4411a and the engaging portion 4422 of the posture maintaining member 4420 so as to face each other.

In the state shown in FIG. 39 (c), the vertical movement member 4430 is pushed up by the load generating portion 4413. As a result, the engagement between the protruding claw portion 4433a of the vertically moving member 4430 and the locked portion 4637 of the movable effect member 4360 is released, and the movable effect member 4360 rotates toward the tilted state.

In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 39 (c) (the state in which the vertical movement member 4430 is arranged at the upper limit position of the vertical movement), the protruding claw portion 4433a of the vertical movement member 4430 is the movable effect member for the first time. It is arranged outside the movement locus of the locked portion 4637 of the 4360. Therefore, after the vertical movement member 4430 is in the state shown in FIG. 39 (c), the movable effect member 4360 starts the tilting operation.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the moving upper lid member 4332 starts moving toward the open state (retracted state), the movable effect member 4360 starts rotating from the standing state to the tilted state. That is, when the moving upper lid member 4332 is started to operate toward the open state (evacuated state), the movable effect member 4360 is maintained in the upright state.

FIG. 40 (a) shows a state in which the excitation (driving) of the solenoid 2333 is released from the state shown in FIG. 39 (c) and the first transmission member 2340 and the second transmission member 2350 are lowered. As described above, in the process of lowering the first transmission member 2340, the engaging claw Na does not rotate the rotating member 4410.

Therefore, in FIG. 40 (a), the rotating member 4410 maintains the same posture as in FIG. 39 (c), while the movable effect member 4360 is pushed down by the second transmission member 2350 and changes its state to the upright state.

When the solenoid 2333 is driven (excited) from the state shown in FIG. 40 (a), the state changes toward the state shown in FIG. 40 (b). In FIG. 40 (b), the first transmission member 2340 is placed at the upper limit position as the moving end of the vertical movement, which is arranged after the solenoid 2333 is driven (excited), and after the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 2333 is released. A state in which the movable solenoid member 4360 is hindered from the tilting operation at the tip of the extending rod-shaped portion 2353 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 40 (b), when the first transmission member 2340 rises, the second transmission member 2350 moves in the direction away from the movable effect member 4360, while the vertical position of the load generating portion 4413 is along the circular locus. As a result, the vertical movement member 4430 is lowered and approaches the locked portion 4637 of the movable effect member 4360.

Here, by forming the recessed portion 4431a in the vertical movement member 4430, the first rotation angle, which is the angle formed by the vertical line, is the angle between the line connecting the rotation axes of the upper load generation portion 4413 and the rotation member 4410. Even in the same case, the load generating portion 4413 is in front of the rotating shaft as compared with the case where the load generating portion 4413 is behind the rotating shaft (see FIG. 39 (b)) (FIG. 40 (b)). (See), the vertical position of the vertical movement member 4430 is lowered.

That is, in the process of FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (c), the engagement between the locking portion 4433 and the locked portion 4637 is released (the locking portion 4433 deviates from the movement locus of the locked portion 4637). Even if the rotating member 4410 is in the posture of the first rotation angle in the case of being placed in the vertical position) in the process of FIGS. As the lowering, the locking portion 4433 approaches the locked portion 4637.

In the present embodiment, the recessed depth of the recessed portion 4431a is such that the locking portion 4433 can enter the inside of the moving locus of the locked portion 4637 by the lowering operation of the vertical moving member 4430, and the coil spring. The elastic coefficient of SP4b is such that the locked portion 4433 is locked while the locked portion 4637 is arranged in front of the locked portion 4433 between FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b). The magnitude required to generate the force required to enter the inside of the movement locus of 4637 is set respectively.

That is, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), even when the second transmission member 2350 moves in the direction away from the movable effect member 4360 and the movable effect member 4360 is about to tilt, the vertical movement member 4430 descends. In the process of moving up and down, the locking portion 4433 of the vertically moving member 4430 is caught by the locked portion 4637 and a load is applied, so that the movable effect member 4360 is in an upright state due to the influence of the inclination of the locking portion 4433 and the locked portion 4637. (See FIG. 40 (c)).

Then, when the excitation (driving) of the solenoid 2333 is released from the state shown in FIG. 40 (c), the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 39 (a). That is, with the solenoid 2333 being excited (driven) twice, the operations of one set from FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (c) and 40 (a) to 40 (c) are repeated. Will be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the relationship between the operation of the solenoid 2333 by excitation (driving) in the present embodiment and the operation of the moving upper lid member 4332 and the movable effect member 4360 will be described with a timing chart. In the description of FIG. 41, FIGS. 39 and 40 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing timekeeping changes in the positions and states of the moving upper lid member 4332, the solenoid 2333, and the movable effect member 4360 in the present embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 41, each time point t1 to t8 described in FIG. 26A is described in advance.

As shown in FIG. 41, the moving upper lid member 4332 and the movable effect member 4360 change their states as the solenoid 2333 is switched between excitation and non-excitation, but a time difference occurs as described above. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

When the solenoid 2333 starts to be excited (driven) at the first time point t1, the first transmission member 2340 and the second transmission member 2350 start the ascending operation, while being engaged with the vertical movement member 4430, the movable effect member. The 4360 is maintained in an upright position (see FIG. 39 (b)).

The maintenance of the upright state of the movable effect member 4360 is released after the vertical movement member 4430 is arranged at the upper limit position of the vertical movement as described above. Here, assuming that the timing at which the vertical movement member 4430 is arranged at the upper limit position is substantially the same as the timing at which the first transmission member 2340 is arranged at the upper end position after the solenoid 2333 is excited, the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw Immediately after the fourth time point t4 when the portion 2333c (see FIGS. 18 and 19) reaches the upper end, the movable effect member 4360 starts tilting toward the tilted state.

Even if the above assumption is not made, the timing at which the vertical movement member 4430 is arranged at the upper limit position is at least the state shown in FIG. 39 (b) (the hook-shaped member 333b and the claw portion 2333c are arranged at the intermediate position of the movement range). Since it is clear that it is later than the state in which the movable upper lid member 4332 is tilted, the timing at which the movable effect member 4360 starts tilting is at least after the moving upper lid member 4332 starts moving toward the open state.

That is, the movable effect member 4360 operates in response to the operation of the moving upper lid member 4332, but the operation starts after the moving upper lid member 4332 starts the operation. In other words, the movable effect member 4360 starts operating at a timing after a predetermined period based on the timing at which the moving upper lid member 4332 starts operating.

The operation mode of the moving upper lid member 4332 and the movable effect member 4360 when the excitation (driving) of the solenoid 2333 is released is the same as that described in the above embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted (FIG. 26 (a). )reference).

As is clear from the explanation again in FIG. 41, the movable effect member 4360 and the moving upper lid member 4332 are interlocked with the operation by the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333, but the operation timing of the movable effect member 4360 and the movable upper lid member 4332 is There is a time lag, not at the same time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 41, the above-mentioned time difference delays the operation start timing of the movable effect member 4360 from the operation start timing of the moving upper lid member 4332.

The player can visually recognize the operation mode of the moving upper lid member 4332 and the movable effect member 4360 through the front plate member 2320, and directly enters the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 15). Timing of change to the retracted state (state in which the game ball is allowed to enter) The movable effect member 4360 changes to the tilted state at a timing later than that.

Therefore, as compared with the case where only the moving upper lid member 4332 is visually recognized by the player, the game can be played so as to launch the game ball at the timing after the movable effect member 4360 has changed to the tilted state. It is possible to prevent the player from causing a ball loss due to firing the game ball before the member 4332 is in the open state (evacuated state).

As described above, in the present embodiment, by visually recognizing the switching of the state of the movable effect member 4360, the state of the moving upper lid member 4332 can be grasped without directly looking at the moving upper lid member 4332. As a result, the state of the moving upper lid member 4332 can be easily grasped as compared with the case where only the moving upper lid member 4332 operates.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, there is one that notifies "Aim at the attacker" or the like by a liquid crystal display or voice at the timing when the game ball can be inserted into the specific winning opening 65a. The time interval between the timing of the notification and the timing at which the game ball can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a generally changes depending on the model. Therefore, when the timing from the notification to the actual entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a is long, the timing at which the game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a even though the game ball is launched according to the notification. Since the specific winning opening 65a does not change to a state that allows the entry of the game ball, the game ball may pass by without being able to enter the specific winning opening 65a, which is a factor of the player's dissatisfaction. It was.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by confirming the timing at which the movable effect member 4360 starts operating toward the tilted state, the player can perform the moving upper lid member 4332 instead of indirect notification such as a liquid crystal display or voice. As a direct notification of the operation of the member that is interlocked with the operation of the moving upper lid member 4332 with a certain time lag, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the moving upper lid member 4332 starts the operation before the moving upper lid member 4332 starts the operation. Therefore, the player can start firing the game ball toward the specific winning opening 65a without hesitation with certainty of the timing at which the specific winning opening 65a allows the entering of the game ball.

Further, by grasping the timing at which the moving upper lid member 4332 starts operating before the moving upper lid member 4332 starts operating, the game ball is compared with the case where the game ball is launched after confirming the operation of the moving upper lid member 4332. You can accelerate the timing of launching. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period from when the moving upper lid member 4332 actually changes to the state where the game ball is allowed to pass until the game ball passes through the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being delayed.

An example of playability that can be realized by using the configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing timekeeping changes in the outputs of the moving upper lid member 4332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 4360, the sensor S, the second sensor S2, the regulation valve VB, and the V winning sensor VC in the second operation pattern. .. In the figures of the sensor S, the second sensor S2, and the V winning sensor VC, the ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball is detected. Further, the specified number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a refers to the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the second sensor S2.

In addition, in FIG. 42, the operation of the moving upper lid member 4332 and the movable effect member 4360 when the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) is omitted from the illustration regarding the deviation of the operation start timing described above, and the operation starts at the same point. Illustrated as.

When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. Hereinafter, the operation control of the moving upper lid member 4332 performed when the jackpot game is given will be described.

In the case of a predetermined jackpot game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the moving upper lid member 4332 operates based on the second operation pattern. The driving (excitation) mode of the solenoid 2333 itself is not different between the first operating pattern and the second operating pattern.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 has a solenoid 2333 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the moving upper lid member 4332 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 4332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to open the specific winning opening 65a. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be opened, so that the moving upper lid member 4332 operates for a long time.

In the long-time operation of the moving upper lid member 4332, the moving upper lid member 4332 is brought into the closed state (overhanging state) when the scheduled closing operation time Ta (5 seconds) elapses, and after a predetermined time (1 second in the present embodiment) elapses. , The moving upper lid member 4332 is set to the open state (retracted state) again.

The scheduled closing operation time Ta is longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a when the game balls are continuously fired, and a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls. Is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

In the second operation pattern, the movable effect member 4360 is set to the tilted state at the scheduled closing operation time Ta, and the movable effect member 4360 is set to the upright state after the lapse of the scheduled closing operation time Ta. Therefore, the game ball can ride on the extended floor portion 2331e arranged on the front side of the V winning sensor VC only at the scheduled closing operation time Ta.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 4332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. ..

FIG. 42 illustrates an example of the passage mode of the game ball detected by the sensor S and the sensor S2 when the game ball is continuously launched by the so-called “left-handed” described above. That is, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 29) at the scheduled closing operation time Ta in which the movable effect member 4360 maintains the tilted state, the game ball is detected by the second sensor S2. There is a possibility, and other game balls are detected by the sensor S.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the game ball can pass through the second sensor S2 can be limited from the start of the round game R to before the lapse of the scheduled closing operation time Ta.

Therefore, for example, the timing of entering the game ball into the V winning sensor VC (see FIG. 34), which is generally seen in pachinko machines equipped with a V probability variation attacker, is limited by a single drive source (solenoid 2333). can do.

In the present embodiment, when the V winning sensor VC is arranged downstream of the second sensor S2, the second sensor S2 is arranged in a pair on the left and right, so that the player can play the game by so-called "right-handed". Even if the ball is continuously fired, the possibility that the game ball passes through the second sensor S2 and the possibility that the game ball passes through the V winning sensor VC can be kept high.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the player is left-handed or right-handed during the period of the round game R in which the game ball is controlled to pass through the V winning sensor VC, or in the period before the round game R. The notification prompting the continuous firing of the game ball is executed by the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227, or the like (see FIG. 4). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the opportunity to win the V winning sensor VC due to the player not launching the game ball.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means has a solenoid 2333 to hold the moving upper lid member 4332 in the closed state (overhanging state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 4332 is opened from the closed state (overhanging state) (overhanging state). The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced to the retracted state) and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, so that the moving upper lid member 4332 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 4332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15 rounds is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round game Rs, and the moving upper lid member 4332 is closed (overhanging state). ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means keeps the moving upper lid member 4332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. It is controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

Another example of playability that can be realized by using the configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the outputs of the moving upper lid member 4332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 4360, the sensor S, the second sensor S2, and the V winning sensor VC in another example 1 of the second operation pattern. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the outputs of the moving upper lid member 4332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 4360, the sensor S, the second sensor S2, and the V winning sensor VC in the second operation pattern of another example 2. be. In the figures of the sensor S, the second sensor S2, and the V winning sensor VC, the ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball is detected.

In addition, in FIGS. 43 and 44, the operation of the moving upper lid member 4332 and the movable effect member 4360 when the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) is omitted from the illustration regarding the deviation of the operation start timing described above, and at the same point. It is illustrated as the one that starts operation.

An outline of another example 1 of the second operation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 43. In another example 1 of the second operation pattern, as compared with the second operation pattern, the timing at which the movable effect member 4360 is tilted with respect to the operation of the moving upper lid member 4332 (according to the number of movements of the moving upper lid member 4332). (Is it the timing?) Changes. That is, during the slide operation toward the open state (retracted state) of the moving upper lid member 4332 for the first time, the movable effect member 4360 maintains the standing state and is directed to the open state (retracted state) of the moving upper lid member 4332 for the second time. With the sliding operation, the movable effect member 4360 changes to a tilted state. Hereinafter, an application example of another example 1 of the second operation pattern will be described in detail.

When the small hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the small hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure variation display (design variation effect) ends. .. Hereinafter, the operation control of the moving upper lid member 4332 performed when the small hit game is given will be described.

The small hit game is a game state in which the possibility that the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a is extremely low, and the prize ball is not substantially paid out.

In the case of a predetermined small hit game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the moving upper lid member 4332 operates based on another example 1 of the second operation pattern. Some explanations may be omitted for parts where the explanations are duplicated.

The MPU 201 starts a small hit game when the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed.

In another example 1 of the second operation pattern, the moving upper lid member 4332 opens and closes twice during the short opening operation time Ts (about 1.8 seconds). In the first short opening time Ts1 in which the open state (evacuated state) is maintained for the first time, the movable effect member 4360 is set to the upright state, and the closing time Tsc (0.2 seconds) is set from the end of the first short opening time Ts1. After a lapse of time, the moving upper lid member 4332 slides toward the open state (retracted state), and then the movable upper lid member 4332 is maintained in the open state (retracted state) during the second short opening time Ts2, the movable effect member 4360. Is in a tilted state.

Therefore, in the first short opening time Ts1, the game ball cannot ride on the extended floor portion 2331e (see FIG. 34) arranged on the front side of the V winning sensor VC, and the first short opening time Ts1 and closing Only after the lapse of time Tsc, the game ball can ride on the extended floor portion 2331e arranged on the front side of the V winning sensor VC.

In the present alternative example 1, the first short opening time Ts1 is set in 0.5 seconds, and the second short opening time Ts2 is set in 1.0 seconds.

Then, when the small hit end condition (elapse of short opening operation time Ts or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment)) is satisfied, the moving upper lid member 4332 is closed (overhanging state). The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced to and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the small hit game is completed. Since it is practically impossible for a specified number of game balls to win during the short opening operation time Ts, the small hit game ends when the short opening operation time Ts (about 1.8 seconds) elapses. ..

FIG. 43 shows an example of a passing mode of the game ball detected by the sensor S, the second sensor S2, and the V winning sensor VC when the game ball is continuously fired at the specific winning opening 65a. That is, in the present embodiment, as in the above-described embodiment, when the movable effect member 4360 is in the tilted state, the game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 34) is the sensor S or the second sensor S2. It is distributed to.

On the other hand, when the movable effect member 4360 is in the upright state (during the first short opening time Ts1), the game ball that has reached the front side of the specific winning opening 65a will flow down exclusively on the path C2a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being detected by the second sensor S2 and the V winning sensor VC during the first short opening time Ts1.

An outline of another example 2 of the second operation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 44. In another example 2 of the second operation pattern, the third short opening time Ts3 (0.2 seconds) is set instead of the second short opening time Ts2 as compared with the second example 1 of the second operation pattern. Only that is different.

That is, the second opening of the moving upper lid member 4332 that allows the game ball to enter the second sensor S2 is the short opening operation. In this case, even if the game ball falls when the moving upper lid member 332 is opened and collides with the movable effect member 4360, as described above, the game ball is still in the second projecting portion 4332f of the moving upper lid member 4332 (see FIG. 35). ), It bounces toward the left and right inside (the side away from the second sensor S2). Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from passing through the second sensor S2.

As described above, according to the second operation pattern of the second example 1 and the second example 2, the timing at which the game ball can pass through the second sensor S2 is set again after the first short opening time Ts1 elapses, and the upper lid member 4332 is moved again. Can be limited to the end of the small hit game from the open state (evacuated state), and in addition, according to another example 2 of the second operation pattern, the opening operation of the moving upper lid member 4332 is shortened. By performing the opening operation, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from passing through the second sensor S2. Therefore, depending on whether the moving upper lid member 4332 is operated in another example 1 of the second operation pattern or the moving upper lid member 4332 is operated in another example 2 of the second operation pattern, the game is played using only the solenoid 2333 as a drive source. The benefits that a person can obtain can be different.

As a result, for example, a V attacker (in a so-called "1 type 2 type mixer", an attacker provided with the V prize sensor VC in a so-called "1 type 2 type mixer" in which the V prize sensor VC is set so that a big hit is generated by the passage of a game ball). It is possible to omit the regulation valve VB for preventing erroneous winning of the V winning sensor VC, which is generally seen in pachinko machines equipped with the above, and it is possible to eliminate the need for a drive device for the regulation valve VB. That is, the movable effect member 4360 is provided with the function of the regulation valve VB so that the game ball that has passed through the second sensor S2 almost passes through the V winning sensor VC, so that the drive device of the regulation valve VB is omitted. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the arrangement space of the drive device and the cost of members.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the movable effect member 4360 starts tilting is set later than the movement start timing of the moving upper lid member 4332 (see FIG. 41), so that the solenoid 2333 has a third short opening time Ts3. When excited (driven), it is possible to control the movable solenoid member 4360 to return to the upright state before the movable solenoid member 4360 is tilted. In this case, the movable effect member 4360 can be kept substantially in an upright state, and the game ball that has passed through the movable upper lid member 4332 can be configured to flow down the front side of the movable effect member 4360. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has passed through the moving upper lid member 4332 from passing through the second sensor S2 in the third short opening time Ts3. In this case, the movable effect member 4360 is provided with the function of the regulation valve VB so that the game ball that has passed through the second sensor S2 almost passes through the V winning sensor VC, so that the drive device of the regulation valve VB is omitted. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the space for arranging the drive device and the cost of members.

An example of the control mode in this embodiment will be described. In an example of the control mode described here, the opportunity to win the jackpot is when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot. It is composed of the case where the game ball passes through the predetermined V winning sensor VC.

FIG. 45 is a front view of the game board 13. In the game board 13 in the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration described in the first embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650a is arranged on the upper part of the board surface. The second specific winning opening 650a is a large winning opening arranged in place of the specific winning opening 65 in the first embodiment. Instead, in the description of FIGS. 45 to 49, the specific winning opening 65a is small. It opens and closes in the winning game.

As shown in FIG. 45, in the present embodiment, a pair of left and right ball entry monitoring sensors S0 are arranged near the upper end portion of the specific winning opening 65a. The ball entry monitoring sensor S0 is a sensor capable of detecting the passage of a ball, and is arranged on the downstream side of the moving upper lid member 4332 (see FIG. 34) and on the upstream side of the movable effect member 4360 (see FIG. 34). That is, it is arranged at a position above the movement locus of the movable effect member 4360 (movement locus of the arc trajectory) and below the moving upper lid member 4332.

In the present embodiment, the ball entry monitoring sensor S0 is configured to be able to detect at least a part of a ball that has passed downward on the front side of the moving upper lid member 4332, and is not a sensor used for paying out the prize ball, but a third. It is used as a trigger for switching the display effect performed by the symbol display device 81. For example, due to the fact that the passage of the ball is detected by the ball entry monitoring sensor S0, the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect of improving the player's interest, such as "chance!" Or "ball get". It is configured to do.

When the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, the first symbol is displayed so that the jackpot stops after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the second specific winning opening 650a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The second specific winning opening 650a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the second specific winning opening 650a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done. In addition, it is controlled so that 15 prize balls are paid out by one game ball entering the second specific prize opening 650a.

The opening / closing plate that opens and closes the second specific winning opening 650a is configured to be rotatable around an axis along the left-right direction, and is rotated from the standing state (closed state) in which the second specific winning opening 650a is closed and the standing state. , The state can be changed in a tilted state (open state) in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110.

The ROM 202 in this control example has at least a small hit type selection table 202e in addition to the ROM 202 (see FIG. 14) in the first embodiment. The small hit type selection table 202e is used to select the small hit type when a small hit is made based on the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Is.

The contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 47. 47 (a) to 47 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a.

In the first hit random number table 202a, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C3 acquired when the game ball enters the first winning opening 64 is a big hit. In order to determine whether or not the value of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining and the first random number counter C3 acquired when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 is a big hit. This is a table in which the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 and the above are set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is a random number value determined to be a hit in the lottery of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64 ( Judgment value) is set in the table. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "1 to 3", and if it is "1 to 3", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is "4 to 319", it is determined that the value is out of alignment.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Is the set table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is "1 to 318", and if it is "1 to 318", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined to be "319", it is determined to be out of order.

As described above, the first random number counter C3 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. In this first random number counter C3, at the time of lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first winning opening 64, the number of random numbers that becomes the jackpot of the first special symbol is one, and the total number of random numbers is 320. Among them, since the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 1, the probability of becoming a big hit of the first special symbol is "1/320". Further, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 3, the probability of being a small hit of the first special symbol is "3/320".

On the other hand, at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second winning opening 640, the number of random numbers that becomes the jackpot of the second special symbol is one, and while the total number of random numbers is 320, it is a jackpot. Since the total number of random numbers is 1, the probability of becoming a jackpot for the second special symbol is "1/320". Further, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 318, the probability of small hits of the second special symbol is "318/320".

As in each control example described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the symbol "○" is lit as a stop symbol (second symbol) after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed. At the same time, the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

The electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment is opened for 5 seconds or 0.5 seconds when the time is shortened, but is released only for 0.2 seconds when the time is not shortened. Therefore, even if the value of the second hit random number counter C5 is hit when the time is not shortened, it is difficult to make the second winning opening 640 win the game ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which a ball is attempted to enter the second winning opening 640 even though the time is not reduced (the jackpot with a time reduction is not displayed).

FIG. 48 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 48) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment values of the first hit type counter C4 are each stored. It is stipulated in association with the type of jackpot and the type of winning opening that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C4 is selected.

Specifically, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first winning opening 64), the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 49". Is defined with the jackpot G associated with it (see 202b41 in FIG. 48).

When the jackpot G is reached, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the game state after the jackpot game is completed becomes a time saving state (100 times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is digested 100 times. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2400 prize balls.

The jackpot H is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C4 is "50 to 99" (see 202b42 in FIG. 48).

When the jackpot H is reached, the jackpot game of 16 rounds is executed, and the game state after the jackpot game is completed becomes the normal state. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 2,400 prize balls, but cannot obtain the profit of the time saving state after the jackpot game is completed.

In the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the ball entering the first winning opening 64), the game state after the end of the jackpot game can be shortened with a probability of 50%. During the time saving, we will aim to get more big hits by the small hit game described later.

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 640), the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 99" (entire range). Is defined in association with the jackpot G described above (see 202b43 in FIG. 48).

That is, 16 rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed becomes a time saving state (100 times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is digested 100 times. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2400 prize balls.

As described above, the jackpot generated by the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 640) is a jackpot G (a jackpot of 100 times in a short time) with a probability of 100%. Therefore, the possibility of winning the next big hit in a short time after the end of the big hit game is increased as compared with the case where the big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1.

As described above, during the time reduction of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit is increased. It is set to be longer (5 seconds or 0.5 seconds). Therefore, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second winning opening 640, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be performed. Then, if a big hit is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the time will be shortened after the big hit is completed, so that it becomes easier to obtain the big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2.

Therefore, once the time saving state of the special symbol can be shifted, the time saving state of the special symbol that tends to be a big hit of the special symbol and is likely to be a big hit G when it becomes a big hit is likely to be repeated, so that the player can easily repeat the time saving state of the special symbol. It becomes easier to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the time saving state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 49. 49 (a) to 49 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e.

The small hit type selection table 202e is a small hit based on the first winning opening 64, a special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202e1 for selecting the small hit type, and a small hit based on the second winning opening 640. It has a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202e2 for selecting a type (see FIG. 49 (a)).

As shown in FIG. 49 (b), at the time of a small hit based on the first winning opening 64, the value of the small hit type counter C6 is selected, and when the value is "0 to 1", the small hit A (V can pass) is selected. In the case of "2 to 99", the small hit B (V cannot pass) is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 49 (c), at the time of a small hit based on the second winning opening 640, when the value of the first hit type counter C6 is "0-9", the small hit A (V can pass) is obtained. It is selected, and in the case of "10 to 99", the small hit B (V cannot pass) is selected.

In this embodiment, the operation of the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 43) is set according to the small hit type. Specifically, in the small hit game by the small hit A, the solenoid 2333 is driven by another example 1 (see FIG. 43) of the second operation pattern, and in the small hit game by the small hit B, the second operation pattern In another example 2 (see FIG. 44), the solenoid 2333 is driven.

That is, the small hit A is a small hit that is given with a high probability of a big hit when the game ball passes through the V winning sensor VC (see FIG. 43), and the small hit B is a small hit that is not given a big hit with a high probability. It's a hit.

Further, in this control example, the jackpot given after the small hit A is configured to be the jackpot G (16R time-saving big hit).

In this embodiment, the type of jackpot to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of small hit, but as another specification, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. Also, the type of jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the jackpot right is acquired), and the jackpot that acquired the right earlier is executed when the game ball passes through the V winning sensor VC in the subsequent small hit game. You may do it. By doing so, the player can select a small hit to pass through the V winning sensor VC, and the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the present embodiment, the game ball is likely to flow down depending on whether the moving upper lid member 4332 is maintained in the open state (retracted state) or the moving upper lid member 4332 is opened for a short time (opened for 0.2 seconds). The route is changed. In this case, the possibility (ratio) of the game ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a being detected by the specific sensor (second sensor S2 and V winning sensor VC) can be changed without providing a dedicated drive device. can.

In particular, when the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a short time, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a is selectively configured to be difficult to move toward the second sensor S2 and the V winning sensor VC, so that a small hit of the specific opening pattern is made. It is possible to selectively prevent the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 65a during the game from passing through the second sensor S2 and the V winning sensor VC.

In the present embodiment, when the moving upper lid member 4332 is in the open state (evacuated state), the movable effect member 4360 can be switched between the tilted state and the standing state without an individual drive device. .. In this case, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the effect using the movable effect member 4360 while reducing the product cost.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 53. In the second embodiment and the third embodiment, the movable upper lid member 332 and the movable effect members 2360 and 3360 are constantly interlocked with each other, and the movable upper lid member 332 is closed (extended state) and the movable effect member 2360 is moved. Although the case of being in the standing state has been described, in the board surface lower unit 5300 in the fifth embodiment, the movable effect member 2360 changes from the tilted state to the standing state as the moving upper lid member 332 becomes the closed state (extended state). It is possible to switch between the case where the movable upper lid member 332 is closed (the overhanging state) and the case where the movable effect member 2360 maintains the posture in the tilted state. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the switching device 5400 added in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a rear perspective view of the switching device 5400 according to the fifth embodiment. In the following description of the present embodiment, the mechanism for driving the movable effect member 2360 is the same as the first transmission member 2340 and the second transmission member 2350 (see FIGS. 18 and 19) described above in the second embodiment. Since there is, the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 50, the switching device 5400 is connected to the front side of the main body front portion 2331F (see FIG. 18) below the transmission portion 2364 (see FIG. 18) arranged at the right end position of the movable effect member 2360. A device disposed inside the side wall F4a and the bottom wall F4b, which is rotatably supported on the back surface side of the rotating member 4410 in addition to the rotating member 4410 and the posture maintaining member 4420 described above in the fourth embodiment. A lower surface raising member 5440 that changes its posture when pushed from the load generating portion 4413 of the rotating member 4410 is provided.

The lower surface raising member 5440 is rotated backward to the retracted position (see FIG. 51 (a)) by the urging force of the coil spring SP5a, while the overhang position (see FIG. 51 (c)) due to the load applied from the load generating portion 4413. It is a member that can rotate forward until, and is arranged on the opposite side of the pressed portion 5441 that is arranged on the front side of the rotating shaft and pressed by the load generating portion 4413 and the pressed portion 5441 that sandwiches the rotating shaft. Mainly includes a contact portion 5442 capable of contacting the lower surface of the first transmission member 2340 (see FIGS. 18 and 19) at the overhanging position.

The lower surface raising member 5440 is arranged on a plane on which the load generating portion 4413 moves, and the load is applied from the load generating portion 4413 as the load generating portion 4413 moves in the direction approaching the pressed portion 5441, and the coil spring It rotates forward against the urging force of SP5a.

The contact portion 5442 comes into contact with the regulation portion F5d projecting from the side wall F4a in the left-right direction, so that the contact portion 5442 stops at the retracted position during rear rotation.

That is, in the present embodiment, the lower surface raising member 5440 is maintained at a position (retracted position) where the contact portion 5442 and the regulation portion F5d are in contact with each other when the load generating portion 4413 is not in contact with the load generating portion. By being pressed by the 4413, the contact portion 5442 is configured to be rotatable forward to a position (overhanging position) when the contact portion 5442 is arranged directly below the first transmission member 2340 (see FIGS. 18 and 19).

Next, the operation of the switching device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. 51 (a) to 51 (c) and 52 (a) to 52 (c) schematically show the operation of the switching device 5400, the first transmission member 2340, the second transmission member 2350, and the movable effect member 2360. It is a side schematic view of the switching device 5400, the first transmission member 2340, the second transmission member 2350, and the movable effect member 2360 shown in FIG.

In FIGS. 51 (a) to 51 (c) and 52 (a) to 52 (c), a state in which the rotating member 4410 makes a half rotation in the forward rotation direction is illustrated in chronological order. It should be noted that FIGS. 51 (a) and 52 (c) show a state in which a pair of load generating portions 4413 of the rotating member 4410 are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction. , A state in which a pair of load generating portions 4413 of the rotating member 4410 are arranged side by side is illustrated.

In the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described embodiment, the engaging claw Na disposed on the first transmission member 2340 and integrally moving up and down is configured to be able to apply a load in the rotational direction to the rotating member 4410. .. Similar to the above-described embodiment, the engaging claw Na can apply a load toward the rotating member 4410 when moving in the direction of lifting the rotating member 4410, while moving in the direction of pushing down the rotating member 4410. Cannot apply a load to the rotating member 4410.

In the present embodiment, the engaging claw Na is extended in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotating member 4410, and is configured within the thickness range of the rotating member 4410 (between a plane orthogonal to the rotating axis of the rotating member 4410). (Inside the area to be). Further, it is arranged relatively lower than the first transmission member 2340 as compared with the engaging claw Na described in the above-described embodiment.

When a load is applied from the bottom to the top, the engaging claw Na operates relative to the first transmission member 2340 and can release the load (the load transmission is released), while the upper part. When a load is applied downward from the position, the relative operation with respect to the first transmission member 2340 is disabled, and the load is pivotally supported by the first transmission member 2340 in a manner in which the load is transmitted.

More specifically, on the lower side of the engaging claw Na, a protrusion for preventing the engaging claw Na from tilting is projected from the side surface of the first transmission member 2340. As a result, the engagement claw Na is restricted from being displaced in the tilting direction from the sideways posture, and is allowed to be displaced in the rising direction.

Therefore, when the first transmission member 2340 is raised (when the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) is driven (excited)), the rotating member 4410 can be rotated (FIGS. 51 (a) to 51 (c)). ) On the other hand, when the first transmission member 2340 is lowered (when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 2333 is released), the posture of the rotating member 4410 is maintained (FIG. 51 (c)). And FIG. 52 (a)).

In the present embodiment, the lower surface raising member 5540 is pressed toward the overhanging position in the process in which the load generating portions 4413 arranged side by side are arranged side by side due to the rotation of the rotating member 4410. (See FIGS. 51 (a) to 51 (c)) On the other hand, in the process in which the load generating portions 4413 arranged side by side are arranged side by side in the front and back, the lower surface raising member 5540 is reached. The lower surface raising member 5540 is released from the pressing force of the coil spring SP5a, and the lower surface raising member 5540 rotates backward toward the retracted position by the urging force of the coil spring SP5a (see FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (c)).

The action of the switching device 5400 having the above-described configuration on the movable effect member 2360 will be described. In FIG. 51 (a), the state in which the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) is released is shown, the moving upper lid member 332 is in the closed state (overhanging state), and the second transmission member 2350 is released. The movable production member 2360 is brought into an upright state by the load.

When the solenoid 2333 is driven (excited) from the state shown in FIG. 51 (a), the state changes toward the state shown in FIG. 51 (b). In FIG. 51 (b), the first transmission member 2340 is placed at the upper limit position as the moving end of the vertical movement arranged after the solenoid 2333 is driven (excited), and after the solenoid 2333 is driven (excited). The state where it is arranged in the middle of the lower limit position where it is arranged is illustrated.

In FIG. 51 (b), the load from the engaging claw Na is transmitted to the posture maintaining member 4420 via the rotating member 4410. That is, as the rotating member 4410 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the contact position between the rotating member 4410 and the posture maintaining member 4420 rotates, and the engaging portion 4422 of the posture maintaining member 4420 is attached with the coil spring SP4a. Pushed down in the opposite direction of the power. Then, the posture maintaining member 4420 is pushed out of the movement locus of the main body portion 4411 of the rotating member 4410, so that the rotating member 4410 can rotate.

In FIG. 51 (b), the extended rod-shaped portion 2353 of the second transmission member 2350 retracts above the transmission portion 2364 of the movable effect member 2360, so that the movable effect member 2360 rotates toward the tilted state. Therefore, the movable effect member 2360 is tilted before the moving upper lid member 332 is opened (retracted), as in the second embodiment.

When the first transmission member 2340 is further raised from the state shown in FIG. 51 (b), the rotating member 4410 rotates in the forward rotation direction, and the equally divided recessed portion 4411a facing forward in FIG. 51 (b) is lowered. Move to the side. In this case, the posture of the rotating member 4410 is maintained by arranging and fitting the equally divided recessed portion 4411a and the engaging portion 4422 of the posture maintaining member 4420 so as to face each other.

In the state shown in FIG. 51 (c), the lower surface raising member 5440 is pressed by the load generating portion 4413 and rotated forward. As a result, the contact portion 5442 is arranged below the first transmission member 2340, and the position of the first transmission member 2340 when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 2333 is released is raised (FIG. 52 (a)). reference).

In FIG. 52 (a), the state after the excitation (driving) of the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) is released from the state shown in FIG. 51 (c) is shown. Compared with the state shown in FIG. 51 (a), which is the same in that the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 is released by being supported by the contact portion 5442 of the lower surface raising member 5440, the first The vertical position of the transmission member 2340 is set to the upper side. The posture of the rotating member 4410 shown in FIG. 52 (a) is the same as the posture of the rotating member 4410 shown in FIG. 51 (c).

Here, as shown in FIG. 52A, the contact portion 5442 stops immediately before the second transmission member 2350 interlocking with the supported first transmission member 2340 comes into contact with the tilted movable effect member 2360. It is formed with an appropriate length.

In other words, the height H51 to the lower surface of the first transmission member 2340 with reference to an appropriate vertical position in the state where the first transmission member 2340 is arranged at the lowest position of the movable range (see FIG. 51 (a)). ) To the height H52 to the lower surface of the first transmission member 2340 shown in FIG. 52 (a), the length is sufficient to change the vertical position of the first transmission member 2340. As a result, in FIG. 52A, the movable effect member 2360 is maintained in the tilted state.

The height H52 shown in FIG. 52A is the height when the second transmission member 2350 is arranged at a position immediately before the second transmission member 2350 comes into contact with the movable effect member 2360 in the tilted state, and the engaging claws. Na moves below the rotation axis of the rotating member 4410, and is set as a height that can be arranged so as to face the lower equally divided recessed portion 4411a.

When the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) is excited (driven) from the state shown in FIG. 52 (a), the state changes toward the state shown in FIG. 52 (b). In FIG. 52 (b), the first transmission member 2340 is placed at the upper limit position as the moving end of the vertical movement arranged after the solenoid 2333 is driven (excited), and after the solenoid 2333 is driven (excited). The state where it is arranged in the middle position from the lower limit position where it is arranged is illustrated.

In FIG. 52B, the load from the engaging claw Na is transmitted to the posture maintaining member 4420 via the rotating member 4410. That is, as the rotating member 4410 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the contact position between the rotating member 4410 and the posture maintaining member 4420 rotates, and the engaging portion 4422 of the posture maintaining member 4420 is attached with the coil spring SP4a. Pushed down in the opposite direction of the power. Then, the posture maintaining member 4420 is pushed out of the movement locus of the main body portion 4411 of the rotating member 4410, so that the rotating member 4410 can rotate.

In FIG. 52B, the extended rod-shaped portion 2353 of the second transmission member 2350 retracts above the transmission portion 2364 of the movable effect member 2360, so that the movable effect member 2360 maintains the tilted state.

In addition, in FIG. 52B, the load generating portion 4413 that was in contact with the pressed portion 5441 of the lower surface raising member 5440 moves in a direction away from the pressed portion 5441, so that the lower surface raising member 5440 is coiled. It is backflip due to the urging force of the spring SP5a.

When the first transmission member 2340 is further raised from the state shown in FIG. 52 (b), the rotating member 4410 rotates in the forward rotation direction, and the equally divided recessed portion 4411a facing forward in FIG. 52 (b) is lowered. Move to the side. In this case, the equally divided recessed portion 4411a and the engaging portion 4422 of the posture maintaining member 4420 are arranged to face each other and are fitted as shown in FIG. 52 (c) to maintain the posture of the rotating member 4410. NS.

When the excitation (driving) of the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) is released from the state shown in FIG. 52 (c), the first transmission member 2340 descends and shifts to the state shown in FIG. 51 (a). That is, with the solenoid 2333 being excited (driven) twice, the operations of one set from FIGS. 51 (a) to 51 (c) and 52 (a) to 52 (c) are repeated. Will be.

As a result, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the closed state (overhanging state), the case where the movable effect member 2360 is maintained in the tilted state and the case where the movable effect member 2360 returns to the upright state are alternately switched. Can be done.

An example of playability that can be realized by using the configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the timekeeping change of the moving upper lid member 332, the solenoid 2333, and the movable effect member 2360 in the third operation pattern.

In FIG. 53, the operation of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 2360 when the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) is omitted from the illustration regarding the deviation of the operation start timing described above, and the operation starts at the same point. Illustrated as.

When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. Hereinafter, the operation control of the moving upper lid member 332 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

In the case of a predetermined jackpot game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates based on the third operation pattern. The driving (excitation) mode of the solenoid 2333 itself is not different between the first operating pattern and the third operating pattern.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 has a solenoid 2333 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to open the specific winning opening 65a. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be opened, so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

In the long-time operation of the moving upper lid member 332, the moving upper lid member 332 is brought into the closed state (overhanging state) when the scheduled closing operation time Ta (5 seconds) elapses, and after a predetermined time (1 second in the present embodiment) elapses. , The moving upper lid member 332 is set to the open state (retracted state) again.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. ..

As shown in FIG. 53, in the present embodiment, even if the moving upper lid member 332 changes its state between the open state (retracted state) and the closed state (extended state), the movable effect member 2360 remains during the round game R. Maintained in a tilted state. Therefore, when the player determines the opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65a by looking at the movable effect member 2360, the break (between rounds) of the round game R can be easily determined.

As described above, in the present embodiment, for the player who visually recognizes the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) from the front side, the difference in the state of the movable effect member 2360 is compared with the difference in the state of the moving upper lid member 332. Is configured to be easy to judge. Therefore, even when the moving upper lid member 332, which is directly related to the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a, opens and closes a plurality of times during the round game R, the state of the movable effect member 2360 is changed in the round game R. By maintaining the movement, if the operating state of the movable effect member 2360 is confirmed, the break (between rounds) of the round game R can be easily determined.

As a result, the player visually recognizes that the moving upper lid member 332 is in the closed state (evacuated state) during the round game R, and misunderstands that the round game R has ended, and the player performs an operation different from the aim. The possibility can be reduced.

As an example of performing an operation different from the aim based on a misunderstanding, for example, in order to reduce the number of dead balls (game balls entering the out port 314 (see FIG. 16)) in the first interval between rounds. In addition, the operation of stopping the launch of the game ball can be mentioned. When the operation of the moving upper lid member 332 and the operation of the movable effect member 2360 are interlocked each time, the game ball is closed even when the moving upper lid member 332 is closed at a timing other than the break (between rounds) of the round game R. There is a high possibility that the operation of stopping the launch of the game ball will be performed, which may hinder the rapid digestion of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by checking the state of the movable effect member 2360, the break (between rounds) of the round game R can be easily determined, so that the operation of stopping the firing of the game ball is excessive. Since it is possible to suppress what is performed, it is possible to quickly digest the jackpot game.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means has the solenoid 2333 to hold the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state (overhanging state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is opened from the closed state (overhanging state) (overhanging state). The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced to the retracted state) and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15 rounds is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round game Rs, and the moving upper lid member 332 is closed (overhanging state). ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. It is controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

<Use for 2 rounds fluffy>
In the present embodiment, the movement upper lid member 332 is controlled to open and close during the round game R, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the moving upper lid member 332 may be controlled to be maintained in the open state (retracted state) during the first operating time T1.

In this case, after the moving upper lid member 332 is opened (retracted state) as the start of the first round round game R, the moving upper lid member 332 is closed (overhanging state) as the end of the second round game R. ), The movable effect member 2360 is maintained in an upright state.

In this case, for example, if the first and second rounds of the round game R are set to be completed in a short time (for example, 0.2 seconds), the games in the first and second rounds of the round game R are played. The time for the movable production member 2360 to be maintained in the tilted state while suppressing the number of winning balls to the specific winning opening 65a (while suppressing the number to substantially 0) is the time for the round game R of the first and second rounds. It can be secured by the total time (0.2 seconds + 2.0 seconds + 0.2 seconds = 2.4 seconds) between the first interval time between the round and the first interval time Int1.

Therefore, it is possible to make the player who visually recognizes the movable effect member 2360 appear as if the game ball can be won in the specific winning opening 65a.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

According to the present embodiment, the movable upper lid member 332 can be opened and closed twice before the movable effect member 2360 returns from the tilted state to the upright state. In this case, when the moving upper lid member 332 is controlled by opening and closing twice in the round game R, it is possible to prevent the movable effect member 2360 from returning to the upright state in the middle of the round game R. As a result, the break (between rounds) of the round game R can be easily determined, so that the timing of switching the launch of the game ball can be easily determined, and the jackpot game can be quickly digested.

According to the present embodiment, when the moving upper lid member 332 is operated a plurality of times (twice) in a short opening operation (0.2 seconds opening operation), a movable effect is produced over a time including an interval (interval) in the short opening operation. The member 2360 is maintained in an inclined state. In this case, it is possible to make the player appear as if the game ball can be won in the specific winning opening 65a. As a result, the player can fire the game ball even during the short opening operation of the moving upper lid member 332, so that the generation of wasted balls can be promoted.

Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 61. In the second to fifth embodiments, the case where the solenoid 2333 is the only device that generates the driving force for operating the movable effect members 2360, 3360, 4360 has been described, but the board surface lower unit 6300 in the sixth embodiment has been described. Aside from the solenoid 2333, the load generator 500 includes a drive motor 510 that generates a driving force for operating the movable effect member 6360. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 54 is a front view of the lower board unit 6300 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 55 is a rear view of the lower board unit 6300. As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the board surface lower unit 6300 includes the front side unit 310 and the front plate member 2320 described in the above-described embodiment, and is slightly different from the movable effect member 2360 described in the above-described embodiment. It is formed by drilling a variable winning device 6330 having a movable effect member 6360 having a different shape and a base plate 6060 which is a plate member cut into a substantially square shape in front view and constitutes a game board 13 in the front-rear direction. The load generating device 500 is provided in the cavity 6060b formed in the lower portion of the inner rail 61 of the receiving opening 6060a.

The variable winning device 6330 is arranged in pairs on the left and right above the pair of sensors S (see FIG. 56), and is controlled to pay out 10 prize balls based on detecting the passage of the game balls. It is provided with a sensor S3 and a regulation plate 6331 m extending from a position between the sensor S and the third sensor S3 to the front side and restricting the passage of the game ball in the vertical direction.

The regulation plate 6331m is arranged as a lid of the lower passage 331b, and is formed by connecting a pair of left and right extended floor portions 2331e to each other. According to the regulation plate 6331m, the game ball that flows down the upper surface of the movable effect member 6360 is distributed to the third sensor S3, and the game ball that does not flow down the upper surface of the movable effect member 6360 (flows down the lower surface side (front side)) is distributed to the sensor S. Be done.

The mechanism for operating the movable effect member 6360 by exciting (driving) the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) is the first transmission member 2340 and the second transmission member 2350 (see FIGS. 18 and 19) described in the second embodiment. ), So the description will be omitted.

The load generator 500 is composed of a drive motor 510 whose lower surface is fixed in the cavity 6060b, a first clutch member 520 formed as a disk through which a drive shaft of the drive motor 510 is inserted, and a first clutch member 520 thereof. It mainly includes a second clutch member 530 that is supported by the base plate 6060 in a manner that allows it to rotate in conjunction with the first clutch member 520 when a load in the rotation direction is applied.

56 (a) and 56 (b) are partial front views of the game board 13, and FIG. 57 is an exploded front perspective view of the movable effect member 6360 and the load generating device 500. In FIG. 56 (a), the positions of the first clutch member 520 and the second clutch member 530 in the used state are displaced, and in FIG. 56 (b), the first clutch member 520 and the second clutch member 530 are displaced from the used state. The state of being arranged at the above position is shown in the figure. Here, the "used state" means a state in which the player is able to play. Further, the base plate 6060 is partially cross-sectionally viewed so that the shaft support portion of the second clutch member 530 can be visually recognized.

In addition, in FIG. 56A and FIG. 56B, whether or not the moving upper lid member 332 is overhanging is shown by the presence or absence of shading. That is, the portion where the shading is formed in FIGS. 56 (a) and 56 (b) is a portion that restricts the passage of the game ball as a part of the front plate member 2320 or the game ball between the front plate member 2320 and the portion that restricts the passage of the game ball. It means that the portion is so close to the front plate member 2320 that it blocks the passage of.

Note that FIG. 56 (a) shows the upright state of the movable effect member 6360, and FIG. 56 (b) shows the tilted state of the movable effect member 6360. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the sensor through which the game ball passes differs depending on the state of the movable effect member 6360. That is, when the movable effect member 6360 is in the upright state, the game ball flows down the front side of the movable effect member 6360 and passes through the sensor S (see FIG. 56A), while when the movable effect member 6360 is in the tilted state. , The game ball flows down the back side (upper surface side) of the movable effect member 6360 and passes through the third sensor S3.

Further, since the substantial left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a changes depending on the state of the movable effect member 6360 as described in each of the above embodiments, the description thereof will be omitted.

The movable effect member 6360 includes the main body plate portion 2361, the support shaft portion 2362, the sliding portion 2363, and the transmission portion 2364 described in the second embodiment, while the recessed portion 2365 is omitted (not recessed). In addition, an extension portion 6368 formed in a fan shape having the same thickness as the transmission portion 2364 is provided at the center of the support shaft portion 2362 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the right side of the transmission portion 2364.

The extension portion 6368 is obliquely shaved (chamfered) in the circumferential direction at the projecting portion 6368a projecting radially from the right-view clockwise end and the right portion of the right-view clockwise end. A chamfered portion 6368b is provided.

The chamfered portion 6368b is formed to improve workability when assembling the variable winning device 6330 to the receiving opening 6060a (see FIG. 54). That is, as described above, the variable winning device 6330 is assembled to the base plate 6060 by being fitted into the receiving opening 6060a from behind. In the present embodiment, the load generating device 500 is arranged on the base plate 6060. When the variable winning device 6330 is assembled in this state, a timing may occur in which the movable effect member 6360 and the load generating device 500 interfere with each other.

That is, as shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 57, in the present embodiment, the protruding portion 6368a of the movable effect member 6360 is in contact with the front surface of the second clutch member 530, and thus the variable winning device 6330 is used as a base. When assembling to the plate 6060, the projecting portion 6368a may interfere with the second clutch member 530, which may make the assembling difficult.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second clutch member 530 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction within a predetermined range. The distance in the moving direction of the movable predetermined range is equal to or less than the length of the gap required to secure the axial moving range of the first clutch member 520 that occurs in the used state. That is, it is possible to easily assemble the variable winning device 6330 to the base plate 6060 by utilizing the gap required in the used state.

When assembling the movable effect member 6360, the second clutch member 530 is moved from the used state (see FIG. 56 (a)) to the right (see FIG. 56 (b)) so that the protruding portion is formed. It is possible to avoid interference between the 6368a and the second clutch member 530 in the front-rear direction.

Here, since the chamfered portion 6368b is formed on the projecting portion 6368a, the movable effect member 6360 is assembled to the base plate 6060 (when it is moved forward) due to the inclination of the chamfered portion 6368b. Since the load applied to the 2 clutch member 530 can be tilted to the right and the load can move the 2nd clutch member 530 from the used state (see E3 (a)) to the right, the 2nd clutch member 530 can be moved to the right. And the interference of the projecting portion 6368a in the front-rear direction can be easily avoided.

Since the chamfered portion 6368b is arranged on the opposite side of the second clutch member 530 after the used state (see FIG. 56A), the chamfered portion 6368b and the second clutch member 530 do not come into contact with each other. It is configured so that there is no such thing.

The detailed configuration of the load generator 500 will be described. In the load generator 500, the first clutch member 520 that rotates by the driving force of the drive motor 510 and the second clutch member 530 that rotates coaxially with the rotation axis of the first clutch member 520 are configured to be rotatable in synchronization with each other. Will be done.

The drive motor 510 is directed toward the tip end side of the drive shaft 511, which is rotationally driven, a flange portion 512 integrally expanded in diameter with the drive shaft 511, and one end of which is locked to the flange portion 512. It mainly includes a coil spring SP6a that generates an urging force.

The drive shaft 511 has a D-shape (not a circular shape) in the axial cross section on the tip side of the flange portion 512. On the other hand, as will be described later, the shaft hole 522 of the first clutch member 520 corresponds to a D-shape (not a circular shape but an axial cross-sectional shape of the drive shaft 511) which is slightly larger than the axial cross-sectional shape of the drive shaft 511. Shape). Thereby, when the drive shaft 511 is inserted into the shaft hole 522 of the first clutch member 520 and rotated, it is possible to prevent a phase shift between the drive shaft 511 and the first clutch member 520. ..

The urging force of the coil spring SP6a is applied in a direction in which the first clutch member 520 and the second clutch member 530 are to be maintained in the used state (see FIG. 56A). In this used state, the driving force is transmitted as the first clutch member 520 and the second clutch member 530 come into contact with each other in the rotational direction. Next, the first clutch member 520 will be described with reference to FIG. 58.

58 (a) is a left side view of the first clutch member 520, and FIG. 58 (b) is a top view of the first clutch member 520 in the direction of arrow LVIIIb of FIG. 58 (a). In the description of FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b), FIGS. 56 and 57 will be referred to as appropriate.

The first clutch member 520 is a member that is pivotally supported by the drive shaft 511 in such a manner that the phase with respect to the drive shaft 511 is fixed while the movement in the axial direction is permitted, and the first clutch member 520 and the disk-shaped main body portion 521. A shaft hole 522 formed at the center of the main body 521 along the central axis of the main body 521, and a plurality of protrusions extending in the radial direction from the left side surface of the main body 521. It mainly has a section 523.

As described above, the shaft hole 522 is formed from a D-shape slightly larger than the axial cross-sectional shape of the drive shaft 511 (see FIG. 56A). As a result, the relative rotation of the first clutch member 520 with respect to the drive shaft 511 is restricted, and the axial movement of the first clutch member 520 with respect to the drive shaft 511 is permitted. As a result, while appropriately controlling the phase of the first clutch member 520, the first clutch member 520 is separated from the second clutch member 530 when a large load is generated, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force and transmitting the driving force. It is possible to prevent any of the relevant members from being damaged.

In the ridge portion 523, ridges having the same shape are formed at equal intervals. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), four ridges are formed at 90 degree intervals. It should be noted that the number of ridges is set to 4 only as a result of being designed according to the desired movement of the movable effect member 6360 that is moved by the transmitted driving force, and if the desired movement is different, the number of ridges is different. Changes. For example, the number of ridges may be 1 to 3, or 5 or more. The operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in this embodiment will be described later.

The radial cross-sectional shape of the ridge portion 523 is a mountain shape that is inclined so that both sides in the lateral direction become wider as they approach the main body portion 521 in the radial direction (see FIG. 58 (b)). The inclination angle is designed to be about 60 degrees.

As a result, the load (load in the rotational direction) generated from the second clutch member 530 toward the first clutch member 520 during the rotation of the first clutch member 520 can be directed in the axial direction of the first clutch member 520. (Axial components can be produced in the load). Next, the second clutch member 530 will be described with reference to FIG. 59.

59 (a) is a right side view of the second clutch member 530, and FIG. 59 (b) is a top view of the second clutch member 530 in the direction of arrow LIXb of FIG. 59 (a). Note that FIG. 59A shows the initial posture of the second clutch member 530. In the description of FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), FIGS. 56, 57, 58 (a) and 58 (b) will be referred to as appropriate.

The second clutch member 530 is a member pivotally supported by the base plate 6060 so as to be coaxially rotatable with the first clutch member 520, and is formed on a disk-shaped main body portion 531 and the left surface side of the main body portion 531. A shaft rod portion 532 that protrudes from the step portion to the left side along the central axis in a circular cross section, and a plurality of portions that project axially from the right side surface of the main body portion 531 and are arranged near the outer periphery. It mainly includes a projecting point portion 533, an extension portion 534 extending in the outer shape direction from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 531 and a weight portion 535 formed so as to project from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 531.

The shaft rod portion 532 is slidably supported by the base plate 6060 (see FIGS. 56 (a) and 56 (b)). The slide movement of the second clutch member 530 occurs when the variable winning device 6330 is assembled to the base plate 6060 (generated by the load given by the extension unit 6368), and the second clutch member 530 is in use. It is configured so that it does not slide (configured so that no load is applied from the extension unit 6368).

The projecting point portions 533 point to each of a plurality of projecting points having the same shape, and are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), two projecting point portions 533 are formed at intervals of 180 degrees. It should be noted that the number of two is only the result of being designed according to the desired movement of the movable effect member 6360 that is moved by the transmitted driving force, and if the desired movement is different, the number of protrusion point portions 533 is set. Changes. For example, one may be used, or three or more may be used. The operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in this embodiment will be described later.

The projecting point portion 533 has a shape obtained by cutting a cone in the middle in the height direction. That is, the outer shape in the axial direction is circular, and the mountain shape is inclined so that the diameter increases as it approaches the main body 531 (see FIG. 59 (b)). The inclination angle is designed to be about 60 degrees.

When the projecting point portion 533 is arranged so as to invade the movement locus of the projecting portion 523 (see FIG. 58) in the used state, the projecting point portion 523 becomes the projecting point when the first clutch member 520 rotates. The second clutch member 530 can be rotated by pushing the portion 533 to apply a load in the rotation direction to the second clutch member 530.

Then, when the rotational resistance of the second clutch member 530 becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined value (when the second clutch member 530 cannot rotate at the same speed as the rotation of the first clutch member 520), the protrusion portion 533 to the protrusion portion The load applied to the 523 (extraction force generated between the facing surfaces) causes the first clutch member 520 to move in a direction away from the second clutch member 530 against the urging force of the coil spring SP6a (see FIG. 56A). do.

As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessive load from being generated on the second clutch member 530, and it is possible to prevent the first clutch member 520 or the second clutch member 530 from being damaged. When the second clutch member 530 moves away from the first clutch member 520, a leftward load is applied to the second clutch member 530 as a reaction from the first clutch member 520, so that the second clutch member 530 has a leftward load. It is maintained in the used position (see FIG. 56 (a)).

The weight portion 535 is a weight for returning the posture of the second clutch member 530 when no load in the rotational direction is generated from the first clutch member 520 to the second clutch member 530. That is, when there is a gap between the ridge portion 523 and the protrusion point portion 533, the weight portion 535 of the second clutch member 530 is arranged directly below the shaft due to the action of the weight portion 535 itself. It rotates in the direction of returning to the initial posture (see FIG. 59 (a)).

The extension portion 534 is a portion that comes into contact with the movable effect member 6360 and transmits a load. Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the operation of the extension portion 534 in the configuration and the usage state will be described.

60 (a) to 60 (c) are right side views of the movable effect member 6360 and the second clutch member 530 showing the operation of the movable effect member 6360 and the second clutch member 530 in chronological order. D) to 60 (f) are schematic views schematically showing the postures of the first clutch member 520 and the second clutch member 530 shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (c), respectively.

In FIG. 60A, the tilted state of the movable effect member 6360 causes the initial posture of the second clutch member 530 to rotate forward (rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the right side) by the driving force of the drive motor 510. The contact start posture of the first clutch member 520 (the posture in which the protrusion portion 523 and the protrusion point portion 533 start contact with each other) is illustrated by imaginary lines (see FIG. 60 (d)). Further, in FIG. 60B, the upright state of the movable effect member 6360 is the end posture of the second clutch member 530 (the end posture of the rotational operation of the second clutch member 530), and the contact end of the first clutch member 520. The postures are illustrated by imaginary lines (see FIG. 60 (e)). Further, in FIG. 60 (c), the postures of the movable effect member 6360 and the second clutch member 530 have not changed from the state of FIG. 60 (b), and the first clutch member 520 is in the state of FIG. 60 (b). The release posture, which is the posture immediately after the protrusion 523 has passed the protrusion point 533, is illustrated by an imaginary line (see FIG. 60 (f)).

As schematically shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (c), in this embodiment, the regulation stopper St is arranged. The regulation stopper St is extended from the step portion 2324a (see FIG. 55) of the front plate member 2320 so as to enter the moving plane of the extension portion 6368 (not shown in FIG. 55), and the backflip direction of the extension portion 6368. Define the movement limit of. That is, the extension unit 6368 is restricted from moving by coming into contact with the regulation stopper St during movement (see FIG. 60B).

The extension portion 6368 of the movable effect member 6360 and the second clutch member 530 are configured to be movable on the same plane orthogonal to the rotation axis. The extension portion 534 is such that the rear side surface of the projecting portion 6368a and the front side surface of the extension portion 534 can be brought into contact with each other, while the extension portion 534 is not in contact with the outer peripheral surfaces of the extension portion 6368 and the transmission portion 2364. Formed by length.

Therefore, the load applied from the movable effect member 6360 to the second clutch member 530 is limited to the mode in which the load is applied via the projecting portion 6368a, and the load is not applied via the peripheral surface. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second clutch member 530 from being loaded with the frictional force in the rotational direction from the movable effect member 6360.

As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (c), the extension portion 534 is illustrated as an outer shape of the movement locus of the extension rod-shaped portion 2353 (see FIG. 22 (b)) of the second transmission member 2350. It is arranged outside the operating range E6a. Therefore, the second clutch member 530 can operate without interfering with the second transmission member 2350 regardless of the posture of the second transmission member 2350.

As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b), as the first clutch member 520 is rotated forward from the contact start posture to the contact end posture, the protrusion point portion 533 becomes the protrusion portion 523. Be pushed. Due to the pushing force at that time, the second clutch member 530 rotates forward from the initial posture to the terminal posture. At that time, by applying a forward load from the extending portion 534 to the protruding portion 6368a, the movable effect member 6360 can be changed from the tilted state to the standing state. That is, the movable effect member 6360 can be opened and closed by a driving force of the driving motor 510 (see FIG. 57) different from the driving force of the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 22).

The first clutch member 520 is formed from a periodic shape with a center angle of 90 degrees as the minimum unit. That is, the first clutch member 520 takes the contact start posture every time it rotates 90 degrees.

As shown in FIGS. 60 (b) and 60 (c), when the first clutch member 520 is further forward-rotated after the second clutch member 530 is in the terminal posture, the second clutch member 530 collides. Further movement is restricted by the installation part 6368a. The subsequent operation of the first clutch member 520 will be described with reference to FIG.

In FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (c), the operation of the first clutch member 520 is illustrated in chronological order. 61 (a) and 61 (b) are front perspective views of the first clutch member 520 and the second clutch member 530 in the direction of arrow LXIa of FIG. 60 (b), and FIG. 61 (c) is a view. It is a front perspective view of the 1st clutch member 520 and the 2nd clutch member 530 in the direction view of the arrow LXIc of 60 (c). In addition, in FIG. 61 (b), from the state shown in FIG. The state after the clutch member 520 has rotated forward is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (c), when the first clutch member 520 further rotates forward from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b), the first clutch member 520 moves toward the second clutch member 530. By applying the reaction of the load applied in the rotational direction to the first clutch member 520, the first clutch member 520 separates from the second clutch member 530 along the axial direction (see FIG. 61 (b)). .. As a result, only the first clutch member 520 rotates forward and reaches the release posture while avoiding interference between the protrusion 523 and the protrusion 533 in the rotation direction (see FIG. 61 (c)).

During this time, the second clutch member 530 is maintained in the terminal posture by the load applied from the first clutch member 520 in the left-right direction. In other words, the posture of the second clutch member 530 is maintained by the frictional force applied from the first clutch member 520 to the second clutch member 530.

If it is desired to return the posture of the second clutch member 530 to the initial posture immediately after the state shown in FIG. 61 (b) (to prevent the second clutch member 530 from being maintained in the terminal posture), the above-mentioned frictional force is applied. The weight portion 535 may be constructed with a weight sufficient to overcome it. For example, a metal material may be mixed with the weight portion 535 to partially increase the weight.

It will be described back to FIG. 60. In the state shown in FIG. 60 (c), the ridge portion 523 is arranged on the front rotation side of the protrusion point portion 533, and there is no portion for stopping the back rotation of the second clutch member 530, so that the second clutch member 530 Rotates backward due to the weight of the weight portion 535 and returns to the initial posture (see FIG. 60A). Then, the forward load applied to the movable effect member 6360 from the second clutch member 530 is eliminated, so that the movable effect member 6360 rotates forward toward the tilted state (see FIG. 60A).

Further, by continuing the rotation of the drive motor 510 in the same direction, the first clutch member 520 is again in the contact start posture (the posture rotated 90 degrees from the initial contact start posture), and as described above, the second clutch member Rotate the 530 forward.

That is, according to the present embodiment, a state in which the second transmission member 2350 (see FIG. 22B) is separated from the movable effect member 6360 (solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 22A) is excited (driven)). ), The movable production member 6360 can be repeatedly opened and closed (intermittent operation can be performed) by continuously rotating the drive motor 510 in one direction (the direction in which the first clutch member 520 is rotated forward).

The load applied from the second clutch member 530 to the movable effect member 6360 is limited to the load in the direction of moving the movable effect member 6360 from the tilted state to the upright state (limited to a single direction). Similarly, the load applied to the movable effect member 6360 by the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 22A) is limited to the load in the direction of moving the movable effect member 6360 from the tilted state to the upright state. (Limited to a single direction).

That is, when the drive motor 510 and the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 22 (a)) are cooperatively driven, the second transmission member 2350 (see FIG. 22 (b)) and the second clutch member 530 are attached to the movable effect member 6360. Even when they approach each other and come into contact with each other at the same time, the driving force is not transmitted to each other via the movable directing member 6360.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving force generated by the excitation (driving) of the solenoid 2333 from being transmitted to the load generating device 500 via the movable effect member 6360, and the driving force of the drive motor 510 is transmitted through the movable effect member 6360. It is possible to prevent the transmission to the second transmission member 2350 (the transmission of the driving force can be blocked in both directions).

When the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 22A) is released and the movable effect member 6360 is brought into the upright state, the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) is rotationally driven in the forward rotation direction. When the operation of the second clutch member 530 is shown in chronological order, the movements described with reference to FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (c) except that the movable effect member 6360 is in the upright state in FIG. 60 (a). No different from. That is, the load generating device 500 can perform intermittent operations in the same operation mode regardless of whether the movable effect member 6360 is in the tilted state or the standing state.

When the rotational resistance between the first clutch member 520 and the second clutch member 530 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the situation is not limited to the situation described in FIGS. 60 (b) and 60 (c). For example, when a ball bite occurs between the movable upper lid member 332 (see FIG. 56A) and the movable effect member 6360, and the time until the movable effect member 6360 changes to the upright state becomes longer, the movable effect member 6360 The first clutch member 520 separates from the second clutch member 530 and the rotation is continued without waiting for the first clutch member to stand up (in the posture between FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b)). , The first clutch member 520 is in the release posture. The release posture of the first clutch member 520 is defined by the relative relationship with the second clutch member 530, and is not limited to the posture shown in FIG. 60 (c).

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the first clutch member 520 separates from the second clutch member 530 and the transmission of the driving force is cut off can be set as an arbitrary timing. It is possible to prevent an excessive driving force from being transmitted to the movable effect member 6360 in the event of an unexpected failure, and it is possible to improve the durability of the movable effect member 6360.

In the present embodiment, the movable effect member 6360 has been described as a member whose driving force is transmitted from both the solenoid 2333 and the load generator 500, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by omitting the formation of the extended rod-shaped portion 2353 (see FIG. 22B) of the second transmission member 2350, or by omitting the formation of the first transmission member 2340 and the second transmission member 2350, the solenoid can be used. The driving force may not be transmitted from the 2333 to the movable solenoid member 6360. In this case, regardless of the operating state of the solenoid 2333, by driving and controlling the drive motor 510, the movable effect member 6360 can be independently tilted (tilted and upright reciprocating motion or its repeated motion).

In this case, various timings are exemplified as the operation timing of the movable effect member 6360. For example, the movable effect member 6360 may be tilted as an example of the effect when the lottery of the special symbol is missed. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the ball is off, and it is possible to encourage the player to launch the ball. Further, for example, the movable effect member 6360 may be tilted as an example of the operation mode when the lottery of the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, since the moving upper lid member 332 is maintained in the closed state, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out in the small hit. Further, for example, when the lottery of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the movable effect member 6360 may be tilted at the opening time OP of the big hit game. In this case, by configuring the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 with a plurality of types and associating the magnitude of the profit obtained by the player with the occurrence ratio of each operation mode, the expectation for the jackpot game can be expressed by the movable effect member 6360. It can be fanned depending on the mode of operation.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

According to the present embodiment, the chamfered portion 6368b that applies a load to the second clutch member 530 of the load generating device 500 in order to avoid interference with the load generating device 500 when assembling the variable winning device 6330 to the base plate 6060 is used. It is formed at a position where it cannot come into contact with the second clutch member 530 in the state. In this case, since the shape of the chamfered portion 6368b can be designed without considering the influence on the operation of the second clutch member 530 in the used state, the degree of freedom in designing the chamfered portion 6368b can be improved.

According to the present embodiment, the load generating device 500 is configured as a device for transmitting a driving force to the movable effect member 6360 to change the state, and cancels the transmission of the driving force when an excessive load is generated. A clutch mechanism (first clutch member 520, second clutch member 530) is provided. In this case, even if an excessive load is generated between the movable effect member 6360 and the load generating device 500 due to ball clogging or the like, it is possible to prevent the movable effect member 6360 from being damaged.

According to the present embodiment, the load generator 500 can intermittently operate the movable effect member 6360 by driving the drive motor 510 in one direction, and the drive direction of the drive motor 510 is determined via the movable effect member 6360. Therefore, it is set in a direction that does not give a load to the second transmission member 2350. In this case, it is possible to avoid transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 510 to the second transmission member 2350, and the driving force of the drive motor 510 damages the second transmission member 2350 via the movable effect member 6360. Can be prevented.

According to the present embodiment, the operation mode of the load generator 500 when the drive motor 510 is rotated is the same regardless of whether the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) or de-energized (driven). It is configured to be. In this case, since it is not necessary to determine the operation timing of the load generator 500 based on the state of the solenoid 2333, the degree of freedom in controlling the operation timing of the solenoid 2333 and the drive motor 510 can be improved.

According to the present embodiment, the driving force transmission of the driving motor 510 to the movable effect member 6360 can be canceled at an arbitrary timing. That is, the driving force transmission is not released by the control mode of the driving motor 510, but is configured to release the driving force transmission at the timing when an excessive load is generated. In this case, it is possible to prevent an excessive driving force from being transmitted to the movable effect member 6360 when a problem whose occurrence timing is unpredictable such as ball biting or ball clogging occurs, and the durability of the movable effect member 6360 can be prevented. Can be improved.

<Fourth operation pattern>
An example of playability that can be realized by using the configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 73. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing the timing changes of the moving upper lid member 332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 6360, the second clutch member 530, and the drive motor 510 in the fourth operation pattern.

In FIG. 62, the operation of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 6360 when the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) is omitted from the illustration regarding the deviation of the operation start timing described above, and the operation starts at the same point. Illustrated as.

When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. Hereinafter, operation control of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 6360, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

In the case of the jackpot game of jackpot I (see FIG. 67) described later, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates based on the fourth operation pattern, and the fourth The MPU 221 drives and controls the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) so that the second clutch member 530 operates so that the movable production member 6360 operates based on the operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 has a solenoid 2333 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to obtain the specific winning opening 65a ( The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open (see FIG. 56A), so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

At the same time, the MPU 221 drives the drive motor 510 so that the second clutch member 530 is in the end position by the time the opening time OP elapses, and the first clutch member 520 is in the contact end position (FIG. 60 (b)). The drive motor 510 is maintained (stop control) in a state of being stopped at (see). The state of the drive motor 510 is maintained until the end of the first round game R.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. ..

As shown in FIG. 62, in the fourth operation pattern, the movable effect member 6360 can be kept in the upright state during the round game R of the first round. In this case, since the substantially left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56A) can be maintained while being narrowed (the width can be the width of the lower passage 331b), the movable effect member 6360 is tilted. In comparison with the round game R that changes to a state, it is possible to give the player the impression that the flow resistance of the specific winning opening 65a of the game ball is increased. Further, since the game ball only passes through the sensor S and does not pass through the third sensor S3, a plurality of game balls pass through both the sensor S and the third sensor S3 as compared with the case where the game ball passes through the sensor S and the third sensor S3. The flow trajectory of the game ball can be kept narrow.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means has the solenoid 2333 to hold the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state (overhanging state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is opened from the closed state (overhanging state) (overhanging state). The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced to the retracted state) and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15 rounds is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round game Rs, and the moving upper lid member 332 is closed (overhanging state). ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. It is controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

The fourth operation pattern merely describes the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the first round round game R, and the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the second and subsequent round game R is the first. The operation pattern of 4 may be continued, or the operation pattern may be switched to another operation pattern. Further, the fourth operation pattern may be adopted for the round game R of the predetermined round, and the round game R of the first round may be another operation pattern.

<Fifth operation pattern>
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the timing changes of the moving upper lid member 332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 6360, the second clutch member 530, the drive motor 510, the sensor S, and the third sensor S3 in the fifth operation pattern. In the figures of the sensor S and the third sensor S3, the ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball has been detected. Further, the specified number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a refers to the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the third sensor S3.

In FIG. 63, the operation of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 6360 when the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) is omitted from the illustration regarding the deviation of the operation start timing described above, and the operation starts at the same point. Illustrated as.

When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. Hereinafter, operation control of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 6360, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

In the case of the jackpot game of jackpot K (see FIG. 67) described later, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates based on the fifth operation pattern, and the fifth The MPU 221 drives and controls the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) so that the second clutch member 530 operates so that the movable production member 6360 operates based on the operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 has a solenoid 2333 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to obtain the specific winning opening 65a ( The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open (see FIG. 56A), so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

At the same time, the MPU 221 drives the drive motor 510 so that the second clutch member 530 is in the initial posture by the time the opening time OP elapses, and the first clutch member 520 is in the contact start posture (FIG. 60A). The drive motor 510 is maintained (stop control) in a state of being stopped at (see).

After a predetermined time (3 seconds in the fifth operation pattern) has elapsed from the start of the first round game R, the drive motor 510 is driven at a constant speed and rotates forward in order to intermittently operate the second clutch member 530. The constant velocity drive of the drive motor 510 is continued until the round game R of the first round is completed.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. ..

As shown in FIG. 63, in the fifth operation pattern, the movable effect member is in the first round of the round game R until a predetermined time (3 seconds in the fifth operation pattern) elapses from the start of the round game R. The 6360 is set to the tilted state, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the movable effect member 6360 repeatedly changes between the standing state and the tilted state.

That is, since the movable effect member 6360 continuously operates intermittently, it is possible to improve the attention to the movable effect member 6360 during the round game R.

In this intermittent operation, the movable effect member 6360 is applied in a direction (rising direction) in which the load from the drive motor 510 is separated from the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 56A). Therefore, even if the game ball is sandwiched between the inner rail 61 and the movable effect member 6360, the load given to the game ball from the movable effect member 6360 is limited to the load due to the weight of the movable effect member 6360. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the flow will stop.

Further, as described above, two patterns of flow paths of the game ball are prepared depending on whether the flow down the upper surface side of the movable effect member 6360 or the lower surface side (front side) of the movable effect member 6360. The sensor (opening for discharging the game ball) through which the flowed game ball passes is also configured to be different. That is, when the movable effect member 6360 is in the upright state (see FIG. 56 (a)), the game ball flows down to the sensor S, and when the movable effect member 6360 is in the tilted state (see FIG. 56 (b)), the game ball is It flows down to the third sensor S3.

In this case, the behavior of the plurality of game balls can be made more powerful than in the case where the game balls entered in the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56A) are discharged from the openings at the same positions. (It is possible to produce the flow trajectory of multiple game balls in three dimensions).

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means has the solenoid 2333 to hold the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state (overhanging state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

Here, in the fifth operation pattern, the drive motor 510 is controlled to continue after the end of the first round round game R, or the drive motor 510 is before the end of the first round round game R or. Regardless of whether the stop is controlled at the same time as the end, the drive control of the solenoid 2333 can limit the state of the movable effect member 6360 in the first interval time Int1 between rounds to the upright state.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is opened from the closed state (overhanging state) (overhanging state). The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced to the retracted state) and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15 rounds is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round game Rs, and the moving upper lid member 332 is closed (overhanging state). ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. It is controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

The fifth operation pattern merely describes the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the first round round game R, and the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the second and subsequent round game R is the first. The operation pattern of 5 may be continued, or the operation pattern may be switched to another operation pattern. Further, the fifth operation pattern may be adopted for the round game R of the predetermined round, and the round game R of the first round may be another operation pattern.

Further, the predetermined time is set as a time shorter than the shortest time that elapses until a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) pass through the specific winning opening 65a in a normal game method. However, it is not limited to 3 seconds. For example, the time may be less than 3 seconds, or may be longer than 3 seconds (for example, 7 seconds).

<Sixth operation pattern>
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the timing changes of the moving upper lid member 332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 6360, the second clutch member 530, the drive motor 510, the sensor S, and the third sensor S3 in the sixth operation pattern. In the figures of the sensor S and the third sensor S3, the ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball has been detected. Further, the specified number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a refers to the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the third sensor S3.

In addition, in FIG. 64, the operation of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 6360 when the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) is omitted from the illustration regarding the deviation of the operation start timing described above, and the operation starts at the same point. Illustrated as.

When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. Hereinafter, operation control of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 6360, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

In the case of the jackpot game of jackpot e (see FIG. 67), which will be described later, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates based on the sixth operation pattern. The MPU 221 drives and controls the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) so that the second clutch member 530 operates so that the movable production member 6360 operates based on the operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 has a solenoid 2333 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to open the specific winning opening 65a. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be opened, so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

At the same time, the MPU 221 drives the drive motor 510 so that the second clutch member 530 is in the initial posture by the time the opening time OP elapses, and the first clutch member 520 is in the contact start posture (FIG. 60A). The drive motor 510 is maintained (stop control) in a state of being stopped at (see).

From the start of the first round game R, the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S reaches a predetermined number (6 in the sixth operation pattern) less than the specified number (10 in the present embodiment). The drive motor 510 is driven so that the second clutch member 530 changes to the terminal posture, and the first clutch member 520 is driven in a state of being stopped in the contact terminal posture (see FIG. 60B). The motor 510 is maintained (stop control).

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. ..

After the end of the first round game R, the drive motor is such that the first clutch member 520 returns to the contact start posture (see FIG. 60 (a)) through the release posture (see FIG. 60 (c)). The rotation drive of 510 is restarted.

As shown in FIG. 64, in the sixth operation pattern, during the first round of the round game R, a predetermined number of game balls (six in the sixth operation pattern) are detected by the sensor S from the start of the round game R. Until this is done, the movable effect member 6360 is in an inclined state, and after a predetermined number of game balls are detected by the sensor S, the movable effect member 6360 is in an upright state.

That is, the movable effect member 6360 changes to the upright state before the moving upper lid member 332 changes to the closed state (overhanging state). Therefore, the player can easily predict the timing when the moving upper lid member 332 changes to the closed state (overhanging state) by checking the state of the movable effect member 6360 in a timely manner. As a result, the player can easily adjust the launch mode of the game ball, and the waste ball can be reduced.

That is, the number of game balls entering the out opening 314 (see FIG. 54) during the jackpot game can be reduced as compared with the game mode in which the game balls are continuously launched during the jackpot game.

For example, when the launch of the game ball is continued, the game is played by the time the launched game ball reaches the lower end position of the game area (the position where the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56A) is arranged). It is assumed that four game balls fired after the balls are fired are configured to stay in the game area. In this case, if the firing of the game balls is stopped with the fact that the movable effect member 6360 has changed to the upright state, the upper lid member 332 moves until the four game balls staying in the game area have completely flowed through the game area. It is maintained in the open state (evacuated state). Therefore, even if all the four game balls that have stayed are headed for the specific winning opening 65a, one of the game balls is blocked from flowing down by the moving upper lid member 332 and passes through the specific winning opening 65a. There is no situation where you cannot do it.

On the other hand, if any of the four game balls that have stayed has passed through the entry openings other than the specific winning opening 65a and is discharged from the game area, the game passes through the specific winning opening 65a. Since the number of game balls to be played does not exceed the specified number, the moving upper lid member 332 is maintained in the open state (retracted state). In this case, the player confirms whether or not one game ball is fired (single shot) and passes through the specific winning opening 65a, and the confirmation is completed, and the moving upper lid member 332 is still in the open state (evacuated state). ), The game ball is fired again to check whether or not it passes through the specific winning opening 65a, and by repeating the process, the game ball is placed in the game area at the first interval time Int1 between rounds. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball that has reached the lower end position is obstructed by the moving upper lid member 332 from flowing down and passes through the out port 314.

In other words, when the movable effect member 6360 is in the tilted state, the game ball is continuously fired (without hitting), and when the movable effect member 6360 is in the upright state, the launch of the game ball is suppressed (single shot). By switching the firing mode as described above, it is possible to achieve both smooth digestion of the jackpot game and reduction of the number of wasted balls that reach the lower end position of the game area at the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

Since the timing of switching the firing mode corresponds to the timing of the state change of the movable effect member 6360, the player can use the vicinity of the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56 (a)) where the movable effect member 6360 is arranged. If you pay attention to, you can easily grasp the timing of switching the firing mode.

Further, since the balls enter the third sensor S3, which has a short distance from the moving upper lid member 332, from the start of the round until the six balls enter the sensor S, the first prize ball is paid out from the start of the round. The time to occur can be shortened. Further, between the time when the six balls enter the sensor S and the end of the round, the balls enter the sensor S having a long distance from the moving upper lid member 332, so that the balls that have passed through the moving upper lid member 332 The period until reaching the sensor S can be lengthened. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that an over-winning occurs as compared with the case where the ball can enter the third sensor S3 during the round game R. This is the same as the seventh operation pattern described later.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means has the solenoid 2333 to hold the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state (overhanging state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

In the sixth operation pattern, regardless of the control mode of the drive motor 510, the state of the movable effect member 6360 in the first interval time Int1 between rounds can be limited to the upright state by the drive control of the solenoid 2333.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is opened from the closed state (overhanging state) (overhanging state). The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced to the retracted state) and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15 rounds is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round game Rs, and the moving upper lid member 332 is closed (overhanging state). ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. It is controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

The sixth operation pattern merely describes the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the first round round game R, and the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the second and subsequent round game R is the first. The operation pattern of 6 may be continued, or the operation pattern may be switched to another operation pattern. Further, the sixth operation pattern may be adopted for the round game R of the predetermined round, and the round game R of the first round may be another operation pattern.

Further, the predetermined number less than the specified number is not limited to six. For example, the number may be 5 or less, or 7 or more and less than the specified number.

<7th operation pattern>
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing timekeeping changes in the outputs of the moving upper lid member 332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 6360, the second clutch member 530, the drive motor 510, the sensor S, and the third sensor S3 in the seventh operation pattern. be. In the figures of the sensor S and the third sensor S3, the ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball has been detected. Further, the specified number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a refers to the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the third sensor S3.

In addition, in FIG. 65, the operation of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 6360 when the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) is omitted from the illustration regarding the deviation of the operation start timing described above, and the operation starts at the same point. Illustrated as.

When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. Hereinafter, operation control of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 6360, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

In the case of the jackpot game of jackpot f (see FIG. 67), which will be described later, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates based on the seventh operation pattern. The MPU 221 drives and controls the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) so that the second clutch member 530 operates so that the movable production member 6360 operates based on the operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 has a solenoid 2333 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to open the specific winning opening 65a. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be opened, so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

At the same time, the MPU 221 drives the drive motor 510 so that the second clutch member 530 is in the end position by the time the opening time OP elapses, and the first clutch member 520 is in the contact end position (FIG. 60 (b)). The drive motor 510 is maintained (stop control) in a state of being stopped at (see).

The maintenance of the state of the drive motor 510 is continued from the start of the round game R of the first round until a predetermined time (3 seconds in the seventh operation pattern) elapses. After that, in order to set the second clutch member 530 in the terminal posture, the drive motor 510 is driven in the forward rotation direction until the first clutch member 520 reaches the contact terminal posture (see FIG. 60B).

Then, from the start of the first round game R, the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S is less than the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) (6 in the seventh operation pattern). The drive motor 510 is driven so that the second clutch member 530 changes to the end posture, and the first clutch member 520 stops in the contact end posture (see FIG. 60B). Maintains the drive motor 510 (stop control).

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. ..

According to the control described above, at the start of the first round game R, the movable effect member 6360 is in an upright state, and the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56A) is closed (game ball). On the other hand, the movable effect member 6360 is tilted after a lapse of a predetermined time, giving the player the impression that the game ball can easily enter the specific winning opening 65a. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to visually change the impression of the ease of entering the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a during the round game R.

After the end of the first round game R, the drive motor is such that the first clutch member 520 returns to the contact start posture (see FIG. 60 (a)) through the release posture (see FIG. 60 (c)). The rotation drive of 510 is restarted.

It should be noted that the time elapsed from the limit of the firing interval of the game balls (0.6 second interval) until the predetermined number of game balls (6 in the seventh operation pattern) pass through the sensor S is the predetermined time. It is unlikely that it will be shorter than (3 seconds in the 7th operation pattern), but in this operation pattern, in order to prevent malfunction, when a predetermined number of game balls pass through the sensor S before the predetermined time elapses. Is controlled so as to cancel the drive control of the drive motor 510 after a lapse of a predetermined time (the drive motor 510 is maintained as it is, and the second clutch member 530 is maintained in the terminal posture). As a result, it is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring due to a difference in the winning frequency.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means has the solenoid 2333 to hold the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state (overhanging state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

In the seventh operation pattern, regardless of the control mode of the drive motor 510, the state of the movable effect member 6360 in the first interval time Int1 between rounds can be limited to the upright state by the drive control of the solenoid 2333.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the seventh operation pattern, during the first round of the round game R, a predetermined number of game balls (six in the seventh operation pattern) from the start of the round game R are the sensor S and the third. After being detected by the 3 sensor S3, the movable effect member 6360 is put into an upright state.

That is, the movable effect member 6360 changes to the upright state before the moving upper lid member 332 changes to the closed state (overhanging state). Therefore, the player can easily predict the timing when the moving upper lid member 332 changes to the closed state (overhanging state) by checking the state of the movable effect member 6360 in a timely manner. As a result, the player can easily adjust the launch mode of the game ball, and the waste ball can be reduced.

That is, the number of game balls entering the out opening 314 (see FIG. 54) during the jackpot game can be reduced as compared with the game mode in which the game balls are continuously launched during the jackpot game.

For example, when the launch of the game ball is continued, the game is played by the time the launched game ball reaches the lower end position of the game area (the position where the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56A) is arranged). It is assumed that four game balls fired after the balls are fired are configured to stay in the game area. In this case, if the firing of the game balls is stopped with the fact that the movable effect member 6360 has changed to the upright state, the upper lid member 332 moves until the four game balls staying in the game area have completely flowed through the game area. It is maintained in the open state (evacuated state). Therefore, even if all the four game balls that have stayed are headed for the specific winning opening 65a, one of the game balls is blocked from flowing down by the moving upper lid member 332 and passes through the specific winning opening 65a. There is no situation where you cannot do it.

On the other hand, if any of the four game balls that have stayed has passed through the entry openings other than the specific winning opening 65a and is discharged from the game area, the game passes through the specific winning opening 65a. Since the number of game balls to be played does not exceed the specified number, the moving upper lid member 332 is maintained in the open state (retracted state). In this case, the player confirms whether or not one game ball is fired (single shot) and passes through the specific winning opening 65a, and the confirmation is completed, and the moving upper lid member 332 is still in the open state (evacuated state). ), The game ball is fired again to check whether or not it passes through the specific winning opening 65a, and by repeating the process, the game ball is placed in the game area at the first interval time Int1 between rounds. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball that has reached the lower end position is obstructed by the moving upper lid member 332 from flowing down and passes through the out port 314.

In other words, when the movable effect member 6360 is in the tilted state, the game ball is continuously fired (without hitting), and when the movable effect member 6360 is in the upright state, the launch of the game ball is suppressed (single shot). By switching the firing mode as described above, it is possible to achieve both smooth digestion of the jackpot game and reduction of the number of wasted balls that reach the lower end position of the game area at the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

Since the timing of switching the firing mode corresponds to the timing of the state change of the movable effect member 6360, the player can use the vicinity of the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56 (a)) where the movable effect member 6360 is arranged. If you pay attention to, you can easily grasp the timing of switching the firing mode.

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means has the solenoid 2333 to hold the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state (overhanging state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

In the seventh operation pattern, regardless of the control mode of the drive motor 510, the state of the movable effect member 6360 in the first interval time Int1 between rounds can be limited to the upright state by the drive control of the solenoid 2333.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is opened from the closed state (overhanging state) (overhanging state). The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced to the retracted state) and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15 rounds is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round game Rs, and the moving upper lid member 332 is closed (overhanging state). ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. It is controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

The seventh operation pattern merely describes the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the first round round game R, and the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the second and subsequent round game R is the first. The operation pattern of 7 may be continued, or the operation pattern may be switched to another operation pattern. Further, the seventh operation pattern may be adopted for the round game R of the predetermined round, and the round game R of the first round may be another operation pattern.

Further, the predetermined time is set as a time shorter than the shortest time that elapses until a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) pass through the specific winning opening 65a in a normal game method. However, it is not limited to 3 seconds. For example, the time may be less than 3 seconds, or may be longer than 3 seconds (for example, 7 seconds).

Further, the predetermined number less than the specified number is not limited to six. For example, the number may be 5 or less, or 7 or more and less than the specified number.

Further, even if the predetermined time is intentionally set to be longer than the shortest time elapsed until the specified number of game balls (10 in the present embodiment) pass through the specific winning opening 65a, for example, 15 seconds. good. In this case, a predetermined number of balls may pass through the specific winning opening 65a by the time a predetermined time elapses, and the second clutch member 530 is maintained in the terminal posture, so that the movable effect member 6360 stands up. The round game R can be completed in this state.

Therefore, if a game is played so that a predetermined number of balls pass through the specific winning opening 65a before the predetermined time elapses, the balls do not pass through the third sensor S3, but the balls pass exclusively through the sensor S. On the other hand, in order for the ball to pass through the third sensor S3, it is necessary to drive the drive motor 510 after a predetermined time to bring the movable effect member 6360 into an inclined state. It is desirable to reduce the number of balls entering the ball.

Therefore, for the ball that has passed through the third sensor S3, a profit that exceeds the profit that the player can obtain by the ball that has passed through the sensor S (for example, the profit that the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game shifts to the high probability state) is set. By doing so, it is possible to induce the ball to be launched during the round game R in a game mode in which the ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a is suppressed during a predetermined time. In this case, this guidance may be executed by the display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

That is, when the round game R is started, the third symbol display device 81 displays "Probability change if the ball entry is suppressed for 15 seconds!", Corresponding to the game mode that maximizes the profit that the player can obtain. As a result, the number of balls entering the specific winning opening 65a at the start of the round game R can be suppressed. In addition, the predetermined time has passed by hiding the predetermined time, simply displaying "If the ball is suppressed, the probability changes!", And switching to the display such as "Still!" As the predetermined time elapses. It may be notified.

<8th operation pattern>
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing timekeeping changes in the outputs of the moving upper lid member 332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 6360, the second clutch member 530, the drive motor 510, the sensor S, and the third sensor S3 in the eighth operation pattern. be. In the figures of the sensor S and the third sensor S3, the ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball has been detected. Further, the specified number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a refers to the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the third sensor S3.

In FIG. 66, the operation of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 6360 when the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven) is omitted from the illustration regarding the deviation of the operation start timing described above, and the operation starts at the same point. Illustrated as.

When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. Hereinafter, operation control of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 6360, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

In the case of the jackpot game of jackpot g (see FIG. 67), which will be described later, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates based on the eighth operation pattern, and the eighth The MPU 221 drives and controls the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) so that the second clutch member 530 operates so that the movable production member 6360 operates based on the operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 has a solenoid 2333 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to open the specific winning opening 65a. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be opened, so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

At the same time, the MPU 221 drives the drive motor 510 so that the second clutch member 530 is in the end position by the time the opening time OP elapses, and the first clutch member 520 is in the contact end position (FIG. 60 (b)). The drive motor 510 is maintained (stop control) in a state of being stopped at (see).

The maintenance of the state of the drive motor 510 is continued from the start of the round game R of the first round until a predetermined time (3 seconds in the eighth operation pattern) elapses. After that, the drive motor 510 is rotationally driven in the forward rotation direction so that the first clutch member 520 returns to the contact start posture (see FIG. 60 (a)) through the release posture (see FIG. 60 (c)). It will be resumed. As a result, the second clutch member 530 is in the initial posture (see FIG. 60A), and the movable effect member 6360 is in the tilted state.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. ..

According to the control described above, at the start of the first round game R, the moving upper lid member 332 is in an upright state, and the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56A) is closed (game ball). On the other hand, the moving upper lid member 332 is tilted after a lapse of a predetermined time, giving the player the impression that the game ball is more likely to enter the specific winning opening 65a. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to visually change the impression of the ease of entering the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a during the round game R.

In addition, in the case of operating the movable effect member 6360 in the eighth operation pattern also in the round game R of the second and subsequent rounds, during the first interval time Int1 between the rounds after the end of the first round game R. It is preferable to keep the second clutch member 530 in the end posture by rotationally driving the drive motor 510 in the forward rotation direction until the first clutch member 520 is in the contact end posture (see FIG. 60B).

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means has the solenoid 2333 to hold the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state (overhanging state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

In the eighth operation pattern, regardless of the control mode of the drive motor 510, the state of the movable effect member 6360 in the first interval time Int1 between rounds can be limited to the upright state by the drive control of the solenoid 2333.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the eighth operation pattern, the second clutch member 530 is in the initial posture at the end timing of the round game R, and does not affect the operation of the movable effect member 6360 (movable effect). It is arranged outside the operation locus of the member 6360). Therefore, the operation of the movable effect member 6360 is due to the load applied via the first transmission member 2340 and the second transmission member 2350 (see FIG. 18), the characteristics of which are described in the first operation pattern described above. As it is, the explanation is omitted here.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is opened from the closed state (overhanging state) (overhanging state). The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced to the retracted state) and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15 rounds is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round game Rs, and the moving upper lid member 332 is closed (overhanging state). ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. It is controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

The eighth operation pattern merely describes the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the first round round game R, and the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the second and subsequent round game R is the first. The operation pattern of 8 may be continued, or the operation pattern may be switched to another operation pattern. Further, the eighth operation pattern may be adopted for the round game R of the predetermined round, and the round game R of the first round may be another operation pattern.

Further, the predetermined time is set as a time shorter than the shortest time that elapses until a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) pass through the specific winning opening 65a in a normal game method. However, it is not limited to 3 seconds. For example, the time may be less than 3 seconds, or may be longer than 3 seconds (for example, 7 seconds).

With reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, the correspondence between the first hit type counter C4 in the sixth embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol will be described. FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C4 in the sixth embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol, and FIG. 68 is a movable effect member in the jackpot type and the round game R. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence relationship with the state of 6360 schematically.

As shown in FIG. 67, the first hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C4 is each jackpot type. And it is stipulated in association with the type of winning opening that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C4 is selected.

Specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first winning opening 64), the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 34". Is defined with the jackpot I associated with it (see 202b61 in FIG. 67).

When the jackpot I is obtained, the jackpot game of 6 rounds is executed in the fourth operation pattern of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 6360. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 900 prize balls, and after the big hit game, the player is shifted to the time saving state of the normal symbol until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times.

The jackpot J is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C4 is "35 to 49" (see 202b62 in FIG. 67).

When the jackpot J is obtained, the jackpot game of 10 rounds is the elapse of the long opening operation (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1)) of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 6360. It is executed in a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls that are maintained in an open state until the winning is satisfied. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 1500 prize balls, and after the big hit game, from the end of the big hit to the next big hit, a high probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol The probability of winning the (second symbol) is increased, and the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is "50 to 99", the jackpot K is associated and defined (see 202b63 in FIG. 67).

When the jackpot K is obtained, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the fifth operation pattern of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 6360. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 2250 prize balls, and after the big hit game, from the end of the big hit to the next big hit, a high probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol The winning probability of (second symbol) is increased, and the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, when a big hit is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first winning opening 64), the difference in the number of prize balls paid out by the player appears as the difference in the number of rounds, and the rounds. As the number increases, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases, and the time required for the jackpot game also increases.

According to the present embodiment, in the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1, by checking the state of the movable effect member 6360 in the round game R, it is possible to determine the outline of the profit that the player can obtain from the acquired jackpot. can.

That is, as shown in FIG. 68, when the acquired jackpot is a jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot ends, the movable effect member 6360 changes to the tilted state at the start of the round game R. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit that shifts to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game, the movable effect member 6360 is maintained in the upright state at the start of the round game R. Therefore, by paying attention to the movable effect member 6360 at the start of the round game R, it is possible to confirm whether or not to shift to the high probability state after the end of the big hit.

In addition, in the case of jackpot I, as described above in the fourth operation pattern (see FIG. 62), it is possible to keep the substantially left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56A) narrowed. Therefore, the game ball is compared with the case where the actual left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a is the maximum (when the actual left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a is the same as the left-right width of the specific winning opening 65a). It is possible to give the player the impression that the passing speed of the specific winning opening 65a is slowed down. Thereby, the player can be made to understand that the jackpot I is a jackpot with a small profit obtained by the player, depending on the passing mode of the game ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a.

As described above, the movable upper lid member 6360 starts operating earlier than the moving upper lid member 332 (see FIG. 54) operates, so that the player can open the moving upper lid member 332 (retracted state). Before the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56A) is opened, it is possible to confirm whether or not to shift to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot.

Further, after the movable effect member 6360 is in the tilted state, the movable effect member 6360 operates in a mode in which the state changes repeatedly between the upright state and the tilted state, as compared with the case where the round game R ends in the tilted state. The number of rounds in the jackpot is larger. Therefore, the player can determine the number of rounds in the jackpot by checking the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the movable effect member 6360 not only at the start of the round game R but also during the round game R. In the present embodiment, the number of rounds when the movable effect member 6360 repeats the state change is set to the maximum number of rounds that can be acquired.

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 640), the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 49", which is a big hit. e is associated and specified (see 202b64 in FIG. 67).

When the jackpot e is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the sixth operation pattern of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 6360. In this case, the player can receive a payout (maximum payout) of about 2250 prize balls, and after the big hit game, there is a high probability of a special symbol from the end of the big hit to the next big hit. In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) increases, and the ball shifts to a state in which it is easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is "50 to 59", the jackpot f is associated and defined (see 202b65 of F21 (a)).

When the jackpot f is reached, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 2250 prize balls, and after the big hit game, from the end of the big hit to the next big hit, a high probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol The winning probability of (second symbol) is increased, and the ball is easily won in the second winning opening 640.

The value of the first hit type counter C4 is defined in the range of "60 to 99" in association with the jackpot g (see 202b66 of F21 (a)).

When the jackpot g is reached, a jackpot game of 6 rounds is executed. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 900 prize balls, and after the big hit game, the player is shifted to the time saving state of the normal symbol until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times.

As described above, the jackpot generated in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 640) is a jackpot e, f (the jackpot of the maximum number of payouts) with a probability of 60%. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of payouts expected when the lottery of the special symbol 2 is a big hit, as compared with the number of payouts expected when the lottery of the special symbol 1 is a big hit.

Therefore, the profit that the player can obtain changes greatly depending on whether the jackpot is e or f or the jackpot g. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the attention to which jackpot is selected in the special symbol 2 lottery. It is possible to improve the interest of the player.

According to the present embodiment, in the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 2, by checking the state of the movable effect member 6360 in the round game R, it is possible to determine the outline of the profit that the player can obtain from the acquired jackpot. can.

That is, as shown in FIG. 68, when the acquired jackpot is a jackpot e that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot ends, the movable effect member 6360 changes to the tilted state at the start of the round game R. On the other hand, when the movable effect member 6360 is maintained in the upright state at the start of the round game R, it is a big hit that shifts to a time saving state after the end of the big hit game, or a big hit that shifts to a high probability state after the end of the big hit. It is unknown.

Therefore, if the movable effect member 6360 is in a tilted state at the start of the round game R, the player can be relieved (it is confirmed that the state shifts to the high probability state after the jackpot game is completed). At this time, in the present embodiment, during the period of the round game R or the period before the round game R, the player is notified of "probability change !?" or the like (to make the player understand the profit of the jackpot). Characters, figures, light displays, and voice output) that are useful for the above are executed by the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like (see FIG. 4). This can reassure the player.

As described above, the movable upper lid member 6360 starts operating earlier than the moving upper lid member 332 (see FIG. 54) operates, so that the player can open the moving upper lid member 332 (retracted state). Before the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 56A) is opened, it is possible to confirm whether or not to shift to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, if the movable effect member 6360 is tilted at the start of the round game R, the player cannot be relieved yet. If the movable effect member 6360 is maintained in the upright state at the start of the round game R, the jackpot f or the jackpot g is selected, but there is a clear difference in the profit obtained by the player between these jackpots. be.

That is, the jackpot f is the jackpot of the maximum number of payouts, and after the jackpot game, from the end of the jackpot to the next jackpot, a high probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol (second symbol). ) Is a big hit that increases the winning probability and shifts to a state where the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 (a big hit that shifts to a high probability state with many prize balls). On the other hand, the jackpot g is a jackpot with the minimum number of payouts, and is a jackpot that shifts to a time-saving state of a normal symbol until the lottery of a special symbol is completed 100 times after the jackpot game (small prize balls, low). Big hit of transition to stochastic state).

Therefore, whether the jackpot acquired is the jackpot f or the jackpot g is the most important matter for the player. In the present embodiment, by checking the state of the movable effect member 6360, it is possible to determine whether the acquired jackpot is the jackpot f or the jackpot g, so that the attention to the movable effect member 6360 can be improved. Can be done.

That is, in the jackpot f, the movable effect member 6360 is in an upright state immediately before the end of the round game R, while in the jackpot g, the movable effect member 6360 is maintained in an inclined state until the end of the round game R. Therefore, the player can determine the jackpot type of the acquired jackpot by visually recognizing the state of the movable effect member 6360 until just before the end of the round game R.

At this time, in the present embodiment, during the round game R period, the player is notified of "probability change !? Wait for the follow-up report" (characters, figures, which are useful for making the player understand the profit of the jackpot). Light display and audio output) are executed by the third symbol display device 81, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, and the like (see FIG. 4). As a result, it is possible to create a feeling of tension in the time until the jackpot type can be determined, and to improve the interest of the player.

The timing at which the movable effect member 6360 changes to the upright state is defined based on the timing at which a predetermined number of game balls (6 in the seventh operation pattern) that have passed through the specific winning opening 65a are detected. Therefore, when the timing between the timing when a predetermined number of game balls are detected and the timing when the specified number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls are detected is short (the number exceeding the difference between the specified number and the predetermined number). (If the game ball of the game wins at the same time), it is difficult to determine whether the change to the upright state of the movable effect member 6360 occurred immediately before the end of the round game R or due to the end of the round game R. It becomes difficult to determine the jackpot type.

Such a situation occurs when a plurality of game balls are made to win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a at once. Therefore, it is possible to avoid such a situation by firing the game balls one by one with a longer interval than usual.

At this time, in the present embodiment, during the round game R period, a notification such as "Is it a certain change !? Characters, figures, light displays, and voice output) useful for suggesting a method are performed by a third symbol display device 81, a voice output device 226, a lamp display device 227, and the like (see FIG. 4). As a result, it is possible to instruct the launch mode of the game ball until the jackpot type can be determined, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which it becomes difficult to determine the jackpot type.

Even if it becomes difficult to determine the jackpot type, if a plurality of game balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a at once in this way, more than the specified number of winnings will occur. In many cases. That is, instead of making it difficult to determine the jackpot type, the player often obtains more prize balls than the prize balls scheduled for the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to balance the profits that the player can obtain.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit is increased. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easy to put the ball into the second winning opening 640, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be performed. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the probabilistic state of the special symbol is likely to be a big hit of the special symbol, and if it is a big hit, it is likely to be a big hit e, f (big hit of the maximum ball). Since it is easy to repeat, it is easy for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<About the 9th operation pattern (non-V)>
FIG. 69 shows the moving upper lid member 332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 6360, the second clutch member 530, the drive motor 510, the sensor S, the third sensor S3, the regulation valve VB and V in the ninth operation pattern (non-V). It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the output of a winning sensor VC. In the figures of the sensor S and the third sensor S3, the ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball has been detected. Further, the specified number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a refers to the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the third sensor S3.

In this operation pattern, the V winning sensor VC is arranged downstream of the third sensor S3, and the regulation valve VB is arranged at a position upstream of the V winning sensor VC and downstream of the third sensor S3. ..

The ninth operation pattern is intended to constitute a case where the game ball can pass through the V winning sensor VC and a case where the game ball cannot pass through the V winning sensor VC, as will be described later. The operation mode in the round game R is determined to be either the ninth operation pattern (non-V) described here or the ninth operation pattern (V) described later, depending on the jackpot type. Under these circumstances, in the ninth operation pattern, the drive motor 510 is controlled by the MPU 201.

When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. Hereinafter, operation control of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 6360, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

In the case of a predetermined jackpot game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates based on the ninth operation pattern (non-V), and the ninth operation pattern (non-V). The MPU 201 drives and controls the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) so that the second clutch member 530 operates so that the movable production member 6360 operates based on V).

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 has a solenoid 2333 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to obtain the specific winning opening 65a ( The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open (see FIG. 56A), so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

At the same time, the MPU 201 drives the drive motor 510 so that the second clutch member 530 is in the initial posture by the time the opening time OP elapses, and the first clutch member 520 is in the contact start posture (FIG. 60A). The drive motor 510 is maintained (stop control) in a state of being stopped at (see).

Triggered by the start of the first round game R (excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333), the drive motor 510 is driven in the forward rotation direction until the second clutch member 530 changes to the terminal posture. When the second clutch member 530 is in the terminal posture, the movable effect member 6360 is in the upright state.

At this time, the drive motor 510 is rotationally driven at a rotational speed at which the second clutch member 530 can reach the terminal posture before the moving upper lid member 332 starts operating from the overhanging state. Therefore, the movable effect member 6360 is put into an upright state before the moving upper lid member 332 is opened (retracted state) and the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a can be configured to exclusively pass through the sensor S.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. ..

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means has the solenoid 2333 to hold the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state (overhanging state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

In the ninth operation pattern (non-V), regardless of the control mode of the drive motor 510, the drive control of the solenoid 2333 limits the state of the movable effect member 6360 in the first interval time Int1 between rounds to the upright state. be able to.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is opened from the closed state (overhanging state) (overhanging state). The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced to the retracted state) and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15 rounds is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round game Rs, and the moving upper lid member 332 is closed (overhanging state). ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. It is controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

The ninth operation pattern (non-V) merely describes the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the first round round game R, and the operation of the movable effect member 6360 in the second and subsequent round game R. The aspect may be to continue the ninth operation pattern (non-V) or to switch to another operation pattern. Further, the ninth operation pattern (non-V) may be adopted for the round game R of the predetermined round, and the round game R of the first round may be another operation pattern.

In the ninth operation pattern, the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) has been described as being controlled by the MPU 201, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be controlled by MPU221.

<9th operation pattern (V)>
Next, the ninth operation pattern (V) will be described. In the ninth operation pattern (V), the drive time of the drive motor 510 is longer than that of the ninth operation pattern (non-V) described above, so that the moving upper lid member 332 is in the open state (retracted state). ), The second clutch member 530 is in the initial posture, and the movable effect member 6360 is in the tilted state.

FIG. 70 shows the moving upper lid member 332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 6360, the second clutch member 530, the drive motor 510, the sensor S, the third sensor S3, the regulation valve VB and the V prize in the ninth operation pattern (V). It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the output of a sensor VC. In the figures of the sensor S and the third sensor S3, the ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball has been detected. Further, the specified number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a refers to the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the third sensor S3.

In this operation pattern, the V winning sensor VC is arranged downstream of the third sensor S3, and the regulation valve VB is arranged at a position upstream of the V winning sensor VC and downstream of the third sensor S3. ..

When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. Hereinafter, operation control of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 6360, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

In the case of a predetermined jackpot game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates based on the ninth operation pattern (V), and the ninth operation pattern (V). The MPU 201 drives and controls the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) so that the second clutch member 530 operates so that the movable effect member 6360 operates based on the above.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 has a solenoid 2333 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to open the specific winning opening 65a. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be opened, so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

At the same time, the MPU 201 drives the drive motor 510 so that the second clutch member 530 is in the initial posture by the time the opening time OP elapses, and the first clutch member 520 is in the contact start posture (FIG. 60A). The drive motor 510 is maintained (stop control) in a state of being stopped at (see).

Triggered by the start of the first round game R (excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333), the drive motor 510 is driven in the forward rotation direction until the second clutch member 530 changes to the terminal posture. When the second clutch member 530 is in the terminal posture, the movable effect member 6360 is in the upright state.

At this time, similarly to the ninth operation pattern (non-V) described above, the rotation speed at which the second clutch member 530 can reach the terminal posture before the moving upper lid member 332 starts operating from the overhanging state. While the drive motor 510 is rotationally driven, the drive motor 510 is driven for a long time unlike the ninth operation pattern (non-V) described above. As a result, the first clutch member 520 returns to the contact start posture (see FIG. 60 (a)) through the release posture (see FIG. 60 (c)), so that the second clutch member 530 returns to the initial posture. do.

Therefore, the movable effect member 6360 is put into an upright state before the moving upper lid member 332 is opened (retracted state) and the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. It changes to a tilted state. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a can be configured to pass through the third sensor S3.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. ..

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means has the solenoid 2333 to hold the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state (overhanging state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

In the ninth operation pattern (V), regardless of the control mode of the drive motor 510, the drive control of the solenoid 2333 limits the state of the movable effect member 6360 in the first interval time Int1 between rounds to the upright state. Can be done.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is opened from the closed state (overhanging state) (overhanging state). The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced to the retracted state) and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15 rounds is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round game Rs, and the moving upper lid member 332 is closed (overhanging state). ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. It is controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

The ninth operation pattern (V) merely describes the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the first round round game R, and the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the second and subsequent round game R. May continue the ninth operation pattern (V) or may be switched to another operation pattern. Further, the ninth operation pattern (V) may be adopted for the round game R of the predetermined round, and the round game R of the first round may be another operation pattern.

In this operation pattern, the movable effect member 6360 is switched between allowing or restricting the entry of the game ball into the predetermined entry port (sensor S or third sensor S3) in the same manner as the moving upper lid member 332. It can be treated as a member.

As another form, for example, when the movable effect member 6360 is in the upright state, the game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a is detected only by the sensor S, while when the movable effect member 6360 is in the tilted state, it passes through the specific winning opening 65a. The game ball may be configured to be detected by the sensor S and a third sensor S3 different from the sensor S (this can be realized by forming a recessed portion 2365 in the movable effect member 6360).

In this case, in the round game R, it is possible to make a case where the game ball passes only the sensor S as in the present embodiment and a case where the game ball passes through the sensor S and the third sensor S3 unlike the present embodiment. .. Then, by operating in this operation pattern, it is possible to switch whether or not the game ball can enter the V winning sensor VC by switching the control of the movable effect member 6360.

That is, in the ninth operation pattern (non-V), it is impossible to enter the game ball into the V winning sensor VC, and in the ninth operation pattern (V), it is possible to enter the game ball into the V winning sensor VC. Can be.

In the present embodiment, only the game ball that has passed through the third sensor S3 has been described as passing through the V winning sensor VC, but the game ball that passes through the V winning sensor VC is a game ball that has passed through the third sensor S3. The game ball may be a game ball that has passed through the sensor S. In this case, the optimum operation for the movable effect member 6360 is set separately.

In the ninth operation pattern, the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) has been described as being controlled by the MPU 201, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be controlled by MPU221.

Here, various methods have been conventionally exemplified as a method for switching whether or not the ball can be entered into the V winning sensor VC. For example, there is a sufficient flow path length from the opening / closing plate that opens and closes the specific winning opening to the V winning sensor VC, and after the game ball enters the specific winning opening until the game ball reaches the V winning sensor VC. If the period is sufficiently long, even if the V regulation valve VB that regulates the entry into the V winning sensor VC is operated after the opening / closing plate is opened, there is a possibility that an erroneous winning will occur in the V winning sensor VC. Is low.

Therefore, in such a case, the problem is unlikely to occur by controlling the operation of the V regulation valve VB after the opening / closing plate is opened. However, it is inevitable that the degree of freedom in the arrangement position of the V winning sensor VC is reduced.

On the other hand, even if the V winning sensor VC is arranged directly under the opening / closing plate, a method of preventing erroneous winning of the V winning sensor VC by devising the operation pattern between the opening / closing plate and the V regulation valve VB is known. There is. This is because after opening the on-off plate for a short time, the V-regulating valve VB is operated while the on-off plate is closed, and when the V-winning sensor VC is restricted from entering the ball, the V-regulating valve VB is used for V. The opening / closing plate is opened again in a state where the winning of the winning sensor VC is restricted, so that the round game can be executed. In this case, since the opening / closing plate is closed at the timing when the V winning sensor VC is operated, it is possible to prevent the game ball from erroneously winning the V winning sensor VC.

Therefore, in such a case, it is possible to prevent erroneous winning of the V winning sensor VC regardless of the distance between the specific winning opening and the V winning sensor VC, so that the position of the V winning sensor VC can be freely arranged. The degree can be increased. In other words, the V winning sensor VC may be located anywhere downstream of the specific winning opening (it may be directly below or at a position after the game ball has flowed down for a while). However, since it is unavoidable to open the opening / closing plate for a short time, it is not possible to keep the opening / closing plate always open during the round game R. Therefore, it may be difficult to understand the timing of launching the game ball, or the player may suspect that improper control is being performed, which may cause distrust.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operation start timing of the movable effect member 6360 is earlier than the operation start timing of the movable upper lid member 332, so that the movable upper lid member 332 is before moving from the overhanging position. By opening and closing the movable effect member 6360 (from the standing state to the tilted state and then to the standing state), as a result, the operation pattern capable of entering the third sensor S3 and the ball entering the third sensor S3. It is possible to switch between impossible operation patterns.

In this case, as described above, the moving upper lid member 332 corresponding to the opening / closing plate can be kept in the open state (retracted state) at all times in the round game R, and in addition, the third sensor S3 can be freely arranged. It can be maintained at a high degree (in this embodiment, it is placed directly behind the specific winning opening 65a).

That is, it is possible to maintain a high degree of freedom in arranging the V winning sensor VC and to maintain the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening in the open state in the round game R.

<Another example of the ninth operation pattern (V)>
Next, another example of the ninth operation pattern (V) will be described. In another example of the ninth operation pattern (V), the movable effect member 6360 does not return to the upright state immediately after the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 2333, as compared with the ninth operation pattern (V) described above. Is different.

FIG. 71 shows a moving upper lid member 332, a solenoid 2333, a movable effect member 6360, a second clutch member 530, a drive motor 510, a sensor S, a third sensor S3, and a regulation valve VB in another example of the ninth operation pattern (V). It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the output of the V winning sensor VC. In the figures of the sensor S and the third sensor S3, the ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball has been detected. Further, the specified number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a refers to the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the third sensor S3.

In this operation pattern, the V winning sensor VC is arranged downstream of the third sensor S3, and the regulation valve VB is arranged at a position upstream of the V winning sensor VC and downstream of the third sensor S3. ..

When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. Hereinafter, operation control of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 6360, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

In the case of a predetermined jackpot game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates based on another example of the ninth operation pattern (V), and the ninth operation pattern. Based on another example of (V), the MPU 201 drives and controls the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) so that the second clutch member 530 operates so that the movable effect member 6360 operates.

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 has a solenoid 2333 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to open the specific winning opening 65a. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be opened, so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

At the same time, the MPU 201 drives the drive motor 510 so that the second clutch member 530 is in the initial posture by the time the opening time OP elapses, and the first clutch member 520 is in the contact start posture (FIG. 60A). The drive motor 510 is maintained (stop control) in a state of being stopped at (see).

Even after the start of the first round game R, the drive motor 510 is stopped and controlled, and the second clutch member 530 is maintained in the initial posture. Therefore, the movable effect member 6360 is tilted as the solenoid 2333 is excited (driven).

As described above, the movable effect member 6360 operates toward the open state (retracted state) of the moving upper lid member 332, and changes to the tilted state before the game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. do. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a can be configured to pass exclusively through the third sensor S3.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. ..

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means has the solenoid 2333 to hold the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state (overhanging state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

In another example of the ninth operation pattern (V), regardless of the control mode of the drive motor 510, the state of the movable effect member 6360 in the first interval time Int1 between rounds is changed to the upright state by the drive control of the solenoid 2333. Can be limited.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is opened from the closed state (overhanging state) (overhanging state). The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced to the retracted state) and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15 rounds is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds sandwiched between the round game Rs, and the moving upper lid member 332 is closed (overhanging state). ) And the open state (retracted state), and the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. It is controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

In another example of the ninth operation pattern (V), the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the first round round game R is merely described, and the movable effect member 6360 in the second and subsequent round game R is merely described. The operation mode of the above may be continued from another example of the ninth operation pattern (V), or may be switched to another operation pattern. Further, another example of the ninth operation pattern (V) may be adopted for the round game R of the predetermined round, and the round game R of the first round may be another operation pattern.

<10th operation pattern (passing below)>
FIG. 72 shows the moving upper lid member 332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 6360, the second clutch member 530, the drive motor 510, the sensor S, the third sensor S3, the regulation valve VB and V in the tenth operation pattern (lower passage). It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the output of a winning sensor VC. In the figures of the sensor S and the third sensor S3, the ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball has been detected. Further, the specified number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a refers to the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the third sensor S3.

In this operation pattern, the V winning sensor VC is arranged downstream of the third sensor S3, and the regulation valve VB is arranged at a position upstream of the V winning sensor VC and downstream of the third sensor S3. .. Then, the opening timing of the regulation valve VB is limited to a predetermined time (2 seconds in this operation pattern) from the start of the round game R of the first round.

When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. Hereinafter, operation control of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 6360, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

In the case of a predetermined jackpot game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates based on the tenth operation pattern (lower passage). In the tenth operation pattern (passing down), unlike each operation pattern described above, the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) is controlled by the MPU 201 so as to continue a constant operation from the power-on. The constant operation in the tenth operation pattern (passing down) is set to a constant velocity operation that rotates forward at a rotation speed of 10 [degrees / second].

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 has a solenoid 2333 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the second operating time T1 (maximum 1 second) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to open the specific winning opening 65a. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be opened, so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

In the present embodiment, the game ball can roll on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332, and as described above, the game ball can be configured to be always on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332. Even when the operating time T1 is as short as 1 second at the maximum, it is possible to easily allow the game ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

Here, while the operation timing of the moving upper lid member 332 depends on the start timing of the jackpot game, the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) continues a constant operation from the power-on, so that the operation timing of the moving upper lid member 332 The posture of the second clutch member 530 does not always match, and differs depending on the start timing of the jackpot game.

The tenth operation pattern (lower passage) is described as an operation pattern when the second clutch member 530 is in the terminal posture when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the open state (retracted state). As shown in FIG. 72, in the tenth operation pattern (lower passage), the movable effect member 6360 is maintained in the upright state when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the open state (retracted state). Therefore, since the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a in the first round game R is detected by the sensor S, it is not detected by the V winning sensor VC.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (1 second, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2) or the specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. ..

Since the second operating time T2 is sufficiently shorter than the period required for a specified number of game balls to enter the specific winning opening 65a, the round game R in the first round is exclusively the round game time. It ends with the lapse of (1 second, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2).

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means has the solenoid 2333 to hold the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state (overhanging state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

In the tenth operation pattern (passing down), regardless of the control mode of the drive motor 510, the drive control of the solenoid 2333 limits the state of the movable effect member 6360 in the first interval time Int1 between rounds to the upright state. be able to.

In the second round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (evacuated state) to win a specific prize. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open the mouth 65a, so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated in the same manner as the second round game R with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds sandwiched between the round game R, and the movement is performed. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so that the upper lid member 332 is displaced between the closed state (overhanging state) and the open state (retracted state), and the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. It is controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

In the tenth operation pattern (passing below), the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the first round round game R is merely described, and the movable effect member 6360 in the second and subsequent round game R is merely described. In the operation mode of, the tenth operation pattern (passing down) may be continued, or the operation pattern may be switched to another operation pattern. Further, the tenth operation pattern (passing down) may be adopted for the round game R of the predetermined round, and the round game R of the first round may be another operation pattern.

For example, if the tenth operation pattern (passing down) is adopted for the second round round game R and the control valve VB is controlled to be opened at the start timing of the second round round game R, the jackpot game can be played. The posture of the second clutch member 530 during the second round game R is determined not only by the start timing but also by how many seconds the first round game R is consumed. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the strategic nature of the jackpot game for digestion, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from becoming slow.

<10th operation pattern (upper passage)>
FIG. 73 shows the moving upper lid member 332, the solenoid 2333, the movable effect member 6360, the second clutch member 530, the drive motor 510, the sensor S, the third sensor S3, the regulation valve VB and V in the tenth operation pattern (upper passage). It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the output of a winning sensor VC. In the figures of the sensor S and the third sensor S3, the ON pulse means that the passage of one game ball has been detected. Further, the specified number as one of the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a refers to the total number of game balls detected by the sensor S and the third sensor S3.

In this operation pattern, the V winning sensor VC is arranged downstream of the third sensor S3, and the regulation valve VB is arranged at a position upstream of the V winning sensor VC and downstream of the third sensor S3. .. Then, the opening timing of the regulation valve VB is limited to a predetermined time (2 seconds in this operation pattern) from the start of the round game R of the first round.

When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the big hit game (of the determined type) after the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed. Hereinafter, operation control of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 6360, which is performed when the big hit game is given, will be described.

In the case of a predetermined jackpot game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 2333 (see FIG. 18) so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates based on the tenth operation pattern (upper passage). In the tenth operation pattern (upper passage), similarly to the tenth operation pattern (lower passage) described above, the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) continues the constant operation from the power-on so that the MPU 221 continues to operate. Is controlled by. The constant operation in the tenth operation pattern (upper passage) is set to a constant velocity operation in which the vehicle rotates forward at a rotation speed of 10 [degrees / second], similarly to the tenth operation pattern (lower passage).

When the special figure variation display (design variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 has a solenoid 2333 so that the timer means (not shown) holds the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP elapses, the first round game R is started.

That is, the second operating time T1 (maximum 1 second) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (retracted state) to open the specific winning opening 65a. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to be opened, so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

In the present embodiment, the game ball can roll on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332, and as described above, the game ball can be configured to be always on the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332. Even when the operating time T1 is as short as 1 second at the maximum, it is possible to easily allow the game ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

Here, while the operation timing of the moving upper lid member 332 depends on the start timing of the jackpot game, the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) continues a constant operation from the power-on, so that the operation timing of the moving upper lid member 332 The posture of the second clutch member 530 does not always match, and differs depending on the start timing of the jackpot game.

The tenth operation pattern (upper passage) is described as an operation pattern when the second clutch member 530 is in the initial posture when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the open state (retracted state). As shown in FIG. 73, in the tenth operation pattern (upper passage), when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the open state (retracted state), the movable effect member 6360 is in the tilted state. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a in the first round game R is detected by the third sensor S3, and can be detected by the V winning sensor VC.

Then, in the first round game R, the lapse of the round end condition (round game time (1 second, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2) or the specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls is won. ) Is satisfied, the solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R ends. ..

Since the second operating time T2 is sufficiently shorter than the period required for a specified number of game balls to enter the specific winning opening 65a, the round game R in the first round is exclusively the round game time. It ends with the lapse of (1 second, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2).

When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means has the solenoid 2333 to hold the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state (overhanging state) until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is driven and controlled, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

In the tenth operation pattern (upper passage), regardless of the control mode of the drive motor 510, the drive control of the solenoid 2333 limits the state of the movable effect member 6360 in the first interval time Int1 between rounds to the upright state. be able to.

In the second round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the moving upper lid member 332 is displaced from the closed state (extended state) to the open state (evacuated state) to win a specific prize. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to open the mouth 65a, so that the moving upper lid member 332 operates for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) elapses or a specified number of pachinko balls are won) is satisfied in the second round game R. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so as to displace the moving upper lid member 332 to the closed state (overhanging state) and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the second round game R is completed.

After that, similarly, the round game R from the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated in the same manner as the second round game R with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds sandwiched between the round game R, and the movement is performed. The solenoid 2333 is driven and controlled so that the upper lid member 332 is displaced between the closed state (overhanging state) and the open state (retracted state), and the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 2333 is driven so that the timer means keeps the moving upper lid member 332 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. It is controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

In the tenth operation pattern (passing above), only the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the first round round game R is mainly described, and the movable effect member 6360 in the second and subsequent round game R is only explained. In the operation mode of, the tenth operation pattern (upper passage) may be continued, or the operation pattern may be switched to another operation pattern. Further, the tenth operation pattern (passing above) may be adopted for the round game R of the predetermined round, and the round game R of the first round may be another operation pattern.

For example, if the tenth operation pattern (upper passage) is adopted for the second round round game R and the control valve VB is controlled to be opened at the start timing of the second round round game R, the jackpot game can be played. The posture of the second clutch member 530 during the second round game R is determined not only by the start timing but also by how many seconds the first round game R is consumed. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the strategic nature of the jackpot game for digestion, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from becoming slow.

According to the tenth operation pattern, in the round game R of the first round, it is possible to make a case where the game ball passes only the sensor S and a case where the game ball passes only the third sensor S3. Then, by configuring only the game ball that has passed through the third sensor S3 in the first round round game R to pass through the above-mentioned V winning sensor VC, the movable effect member 6360 in the first round round game R It is possible to switch between the state of and whether or not the game ball can enter the V winning sensor VC.

That is, in the tenth operation pattern (passing down), it is impossible for the game ball to enter the V winning sensor VC, and in the tenth operation pattern (passing up), the game ball is entered into the V winning sensor VC. It can be possible.

Further, the moving upper lid member 332 is moved at a timing other than the tenth operation pattern (lower passage) and the tenth operation pattern (upper passage) (for example, the timing during the change of the second clutch member 530 from the initial posture to the terminal posture). When changes to the open state (retracted state), the possibility that the game ball passes through the sensor S and the possibility that the game ball passes through the third sensor S3 can be left.

In the tenth operation pattern, the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) has been described as being controlled by the MPU 201, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be controlled by MPU221.

In the above description, the game ball that has passed through the third sensor S3 has been described as passing through the V winning sensor VC, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game ball that passes through the V winning sensor VC is not limited to the game ball that has passed through the third sensor S3, and may be a game ball that has passed through the sensor S.

Further, a mode of constant operation of the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) may be separately set according to the operation desired to be performed by the movable effect member 6360.

For example, the operation of the drive motor 510 (see FIG. 57) after the power is turned on is such that the first clutch member 520 is brought into contact with the first clutch member 520 from the contact start posture (see FIG. 60 (a)) to the contact end posture (FIG. 60 (b)). (See), it rotates in the forward rotation direction so as to change instantaneously, then stops for a predetermined period, and then releases the first clutch member 520 (see FIG. 60 (c)) to the next contact start posture. It may be controlled as a constant operation in which the vehicle rotates in the forward rotation direction so as to change instantaneously and then stops for a predetermined period of time.

In this case, the time required for the second clutch member 530 to change from the initial posture to the terminal posture can be extremely shortened. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the specific winning opening 65a while the second clutch member 530 is moving. Can be extremely reduced. Therefore, it is possible to extremely reduce the possibility that a game ball that has passed through the specific winning opening 65a can enter both the sensor S and the third sensor S3.

As described above in FIGS. 72 and 73, it is the second clutch member 530 that operates constantly, not the movable effect member 6360. In other words, the movable effect member 6360 is a member that changes its state according to the operation of the second clutch member 530 that operates constantly, but when the solenoid 2333 is not excited (driven), the second clutch member 530 Maintains an upright position regardless of the posture of the clutch.

Since the second clutch member 530 is arranged below the inner rail 61, it is difficult for the player to see it during the game. Therefore, when the player wants to grasp the operation mode of the second clutch member 530, he / she pays attention to the state of the movable effect member 6360 which is easy to see during the game. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the movable effect member 6360 is maintained in the closed state, it is not possible to grasp the operation mode of the second clutch member 530 even if the movable effect member 6360 is paid attention to. It is not possible to know which timing of a constant operation corresponds to).

Therefore, by grasping the movement mode of the movable member that performs a constant movement and adjusting the launch timing of the ball, it is possible to execute a game mode that gives the player an unexpected benefit (establishment of a strategy). Can be easily avoided.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the moving upper lid member 332 of the board surface lower unit 300 slides in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair of long plate-shaped movable members that are pivotally supported on the inner surface of the pair of step portions 324a and are formed in pairs on the left and right are provided, and the movable members are in the direction in which the pair of step portions 324a are continuously provided. A closed state that prevents the ball from passing through the specific winning opening 65a, and an opening that allows the ball to pass through the specific winning opening 65a by swinging in the ascending or descending direction. It may be possible to form a state. Further, with the same configuration, the second winning opening 640 may be configured instead of the specific winning opening 65a.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the light emitted from the light irradiation device 331c is reflected to the front side when the moving upper lid member 332 of the board surface lower unit 300 is in the retracted state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the overhanging state, a portion that reflects the light emitted from the light irradiating device 331c to the front side may be formed in the lower portion of the moving upper lid member 332. In this case, the light reflected by the moving upper lid member 332 is not blocked by the sphere, and the effect of producing the light can be improved.

In each of the above embodiments, the moving upper lid members 332 and 4332 have been described as members that slide and move in the front-rear direction, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left and right ends may be rotatably supported by the shaft and displaced so as to open and close the fan. In this case, even when the game ball is sandwiched between the glass unit 16 and the glass unit 16 during displacement, the game ball can be released in a direction parallel to the surface of the glass unit 16.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the operation start timings of the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 2360 are deviated has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the movable upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 2360 may be configured to start operating at the same time. Examples of the method for realizing this include a method of changing the tip shape of the extended rod-shaped portion 2353 and adjusting the drive timing of the drive motor 510.

In each of the above embodiments, a movable effect member 2360 that is rotationally displaced is arranged on the upstream side of the specific winning opening 65a, and a moving upper lid member 332 that is slidably displaced along a predetermined plane is arranged further upstream of the movable effect member 2360. As explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation mode of the movable upper lid member 332 and the operation mode of the movable effect member 2360 may be the same system, or the operation mode may be reversed.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the movable effect member 2360 is arranged on the downstream side of the movable upper lid member 332 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an effect member operated by a driving device (solenoid 2333) that operates the movable upper lid member 332 as in the movable effect member 2360 may be arranged on the upstream side of the movable upper lid member 332, or may be arranged outside the game area. It may be installed.

In this case, for example, by operating the effect member, it may be aimed to approach (enter) the area of interest of the player (for example, the display area of the third symbol display device 81). In this case, even when the player is not paying attention to the effect member and is paying attention to another area (for example, the display area of the third symbol display device 81), the player can set the operation timing of the moving upper lid member 332. Can be noticed.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the moving upper lid member 332 is configured as a member for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the moving upper lid member 332 may be configured as a member that opens and closes the second winning opening 640. That is, the second winning opening 640 may be arranged at the position of the sensor S.

In each of the above embodiments, the movable effect members 2360 to 6360 have been described as being easier to identify the difference in shape before and after the operation as compared with the moving upper lid members 332 and 4332, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the movable upper lid member 332, 4332 and the movable effect member 2360 to 6360 may be configured to have the same shape and the same operation so as to have a difference in glitter. In this case, by attaching a reflective sticker that reflects light to the movable effect members 2360 to 6360 or arranging an LED, it is possible to easily improve the distinguishability of the states of the movable effect members 2360 to 6360.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the movable effect member 2360 and the movable upper lid member 332 are arranged in such an arrangement that the game ball bounced on the upper surface of the movable effect member 2360 can collide with the moving upper lid member 332 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, the distance between the movable effect member 2360 and the moving upper lid member 332 may be sufficiently separated so that the game balls do not collide with each other. In this case, it is possible to prevent ball biting between the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 2360.

In each of the above embodiments, the movable effect members 2360, 3360, 4360, 6360 are formed from a planar shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, protrusions and ribs may be formed on the front and back surfaces of the movable effect members 2360, 3360, 4360, and 6360 at intervals of a size and intervals that affect the flow of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to increase the randomness of the flow mode of the game ball that flows down with the surfaces of the movable effect members 2360, 3360, 4360, and 6360 as the surfaces that come into contact with each other during the flow. This surface is not limited to the surface arranged below the game ball, and may be a surface arranged in the horizontal direction or a surface arranged above. Further, the above-mentioned protrusions and ribs may be formed on the upper surface of the inner rail 61, or may be formed on the back surfaces of the front plate members 320 and 2320.

In the second embodiment, the description of the LED is omitted, but the description is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the LED may be arranged in the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this case, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a at the closing timing of the moving upper lid member 332 passes through the front side of the movable effect member 2360 and passes back and forth through the lower passage 331b, thereby blocking the light and changing the light emitting mode. Therefore, it is possible to add the meaning of notifying the possibility that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a at the closing timing of the moving upper lid member 332 to the change of the light emitting mode.

In the second embodiment, the case where the front surface and the back surface of the movable effect member 2360 are formed in a planar shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the surface of the movable effect member 2360 or a rib extending vertically from the surface may be provided to adjust the flow path of the game ball.

In this case, for example, by forming the extension length of the rib extending from the flowing surface of the game ball shorter than the radius of the game ball, the rib can be configured as a portion that the game ball can overcome. .. Therefore, it is possible to make a difference in the flow mode (speed) between the game ball after overcoming the rib and the game ball before overcoming the rib.

Further, for example, by forming the extending length of the rib extending from the flow lower surface of the game ball to be longer than the radius of the game ball, the flow path of the game ball can be defined by the rib. For example, it is possible to avoid a collision between a game ball flowing down a position facing one surface of the rib and a game ball flowing down a position facing the other surface of the rib.

In the third embodiment, the case where the second sensor S2 and the V winning sensor VC are arranged at a position to the left of the specific winning opening 65a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second sensor S2 and the V winning sensor VC may be arranged in pairs symmetrically. In this case, by making the operation mode of the regulation valve VB that opens and closes the V winning sensor VC different on the left and right, the probability that the game ball will pass through the V winning sensor VC depending on whether the game ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a from the left or right. Can be changed.

In this case, by configuring one of the game balls entered from either the left or right side to pass through the V winning sensor VC, the player can switch between left-handed and right-handed in the middle of the round game R. Can be made easier to do. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from having time to spare during the round game R.

In addition, the attention of the notification indicating which is more advantageous, left or right, can be improved, and the concentration of the player can be improved.

In the third embodiment, the case where the upper surface of the main body plate portion 2361 is formed from the planar shape of the movable effect member 3360 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper surface of the front half of the main body plate 2361 may be formed so as to be inclined downward from the center of the left and right toward the left and right outside, and the upper surface of the rear half may be inclined downward toward the center of the left and right. In this case, the game ball on the upper surface of the movable effect member 3360 can be easily flowed down toward the second sensor S2, and after the game ball is stopped at the second sensor S2, the game ball is moved to the recessed portion 2365. It is possible to facilitate the flow of the game ball toward the sensor S through the inclination (inclination toward the center of the left and right).

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the locked portion 4637 also applies a load along the vertical direction to the protruding claw portion 4433a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the locked portion 4637 may be formed in a shape that gives a load in the horizontal direction to the protruding claw portion 4433a. In this case, the load applied from the locked portion 4637 to the vertical moving member 4430 is directed in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the load applied from the locked portion 4637 to the vertical moving member 4430 causes the vertical moving member 4430 to move in the vertical direction. It is possible to prevent it from being moved up and down. Therefore, even if the urging force of the coil spring SP4b is weak, the vertical movement member 4430 can be maintained at the lower limit position.

In the fourth embodiment, after the moving upper lid member 4332 is closed (overhanging state), the movable effect member 4360 is changed to the upright state, and the game ball staying inside the second sensor S2 is V. Although the case of flowing down to the winning sensor VC has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by adopting the load generating device 500 instead of the switching device 4400, the movable effect member 4360 is changed to the upright state while the moving upper lid member 4332 is maintained in the open state (retracted state), and the V winning sensor VC You can put a game ball into the ball.

In the fourth embodiment, when the movable upper lid member 4332 is in the open state (retracted state), the movable effect member 4360 is maintained in the upright state, and when the movable upper lid member 4332 is in the open state (retracted state). Although the case where the movable effect member 4360 is switched to the tilted state alternately is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by configuring the main body portion 4411 of the rotating member 4410 so that the equally divided recessed portions 4411a are provided in a 45-degree cycle (8 locations), every time the moving upper lid member 4332 changes to the open state (retracted state) four times. In addition, when the movable upper lid member 4332 is opened (retracted state), the movable effect member 4360 is in an inclined state, and otherwise, the movable effect member 4360 can be maintained in an upright state.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned multiple changes of the moving upper lid member 4332 may be executed (completed) during the same round game R, or may occur over a plurality of round games R. In the latter case, the round game R (1 time) in which the movable effect member 4360 is tilted and the round game R (3 times) in which the movable effect member 4360 is in an upright state are periodically (4 rounds) executed. be able to.

Further, by omitting one of the load generating portions 4413, similarly, every time the moving upper lid member 4332 changes to the open state (retracted state) four times, the moving upper lid member 4332 is set to the open state (retracted state). At that time, the movable effect member 4360 is in an inclined state, and in other cases, the movable effect member 4360 can be maintained in an upright state.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the vertical movement member 4430 maintains the movable effect member 4360 in an upright state causes the vertical movement member 4430 to start tilting later than the movement start timing of the moving upper lid member 4332 has been described. , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, the timing at which the vertical movement member 4430 is arranged at the upper limit position is advanced so that the timing at which the movable effect member 4360 starts tilting is equal to or earlier than the timing at which the moving upper lid member 4332 starts moving. You may. As a means for accelerating the timing, an example is a method in which the lower surface of the vertically moving member 4430 is bulged downward at a position on the back side of the recessed portion 4431a so as to be pushed up by the load generating portion 4413 at an early stage. Will be done. By designing the bulging portion, the tilting start timing of the movable effect member 4360 can be arbitrarily designed.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the ball entry monitoring sensor S0 is used as a sensor not related to the payout of the prize ball has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a sensor that pays out a prize ball as a result of detecting the passage of the ball. In this case, the timing at which the prize ball is paid out can be made earlier than in the case where the sensor S detects the passage of the ball and causes the prize ball to be paid out. Further, it is naturally permissible to dispose the ball entry monitoring sensor S0 in other embodiments.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the lower surface raising member 5440 is maintained in the retracted position (maintained in the backflip posture) by the urging force of the coil spring SP5a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position of the center of gravity of the lower surface raising member 5440 may be arranged closer to the contact portion 5442 than the rotation axis. In this case, the lower surface raising member 5440 can be maintained in the retracted position by its own weight (it can be maintained in the backflip posture).

In each operation pattern of the sixth embodiment, the case where the drive motor 510 is controlled by the MPU 221 and the case where the drive motor 510 is controlled by the MPU 201 have been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive motor 510 may be controlled by the MPU 201 instead of being controlled by the MPU 221 or the drive motor 510 may be controlled by the MPU 221 instead of being controlled by the MPU 201.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the recessed portion 2365 is not formed in the movable effect member 6360 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the recessed portion 2365 may be formed on the movable effect member 6360. In this case, the game ball can flow down toward the sensor S regardless of the state of the movable effect member 6360.

In the sixth embodiment, the sensor S and the third sensor S3, in which the game balls are distributed according to the state of the movable effect member 6360, have been described as winning openings for paying out the prize balls, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in addition to or instead of the function as a prize opening for paying out the prize balls, the function of the V prize sensor VC may be added to either the sensor S or the third sensor S3. In this case, the movable effect member 6360 can function as the regulation valve VB of the V winning sensor VC.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the movable upper lid member 332 is kept in the closed state (overhanging state) and the movable effect member 6360 is maintained in the upright state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. There is no. For example, the lower surface raising member 5440 may be arranged so as to be driveable by another drive device. In this case, when the lower surface raising member 5440 is set to the overhanging position, the driving force of the solenoid 2333 is not transmitted to the movable effect member 6360 even if the moving upper lid member 332 is in the closed state (overhanging state). It is possible to prevent the movable solenoid member 6360 from being in an upright state. Therefore, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the closed state (overhanging state), the movable effect member 6360 can be arbitrarily operated by rotationally driving the drive motor 510.

In this case, when the lower surface raising member 5440 is set to the overhanging position, the driving device (solenoid 2333) that generates the driving force of the moving upper lid member 332 and the driving device that generates the driving force of the movable effect member 6360. (Drive motor 510) can be separated. That is, the movable effect member 6360 can be independently driven regardless of the state of the movable upper lid member 332.

On the other hand, when the lower surface raising member 5440 is set to the retracted position, the solenoid 2333 functions as a driving device that transmits a driving force to both the moving upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member 6360.

Therefore, depending on the arrangement of the lower surface raising member 5440, the operation of the moving upper lid member 332 and the operation of the movable effect member 6360 are generated only by the driving force generated from another drive device, and the operation of the movable upper lid member 332 and the movable effect member. It is possible to switch between the case where the operation of 6360 is caused by the driving force generated from the driving device (solenoid 2333) which is also used.

In the sixth operation pattern of the sixth embodiment, the case where the movable effect member 6360 is changed to the upright state depending on the number of game balls entered in the specific winning opening 65a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, instead of the number of balls entering, the movable effect member 6360 may be changed to the upright state when a predetermined time elapses after the moving upper lid member 332 is opened. In this case, the same effect can be obtained by setting a predetermined time as the time for an average of 6 game balls to enter the specific winning opening 65a when the firing is continued at an interval controlled as the firing interval of the game balls. be able to. Further, by setting this predetermined time to be longer (for example, 15 seconds), the time of the round can be maintained longer, so that the progress speed of the jackpot game can be delayed.

Here, by confirming the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360 in the round game R, it is possible to grasp the game state after the jackpot game ends. If you don't need to know if it will be in the normal state, you can end the jackpot game (round game R) with haste, but if you want to know if it will be in the probable state, you can lengthen the jackpot game (round game R). It is also possible to add a game property that it is necessary to execute it over time.

In other words, if it is more important to receive the lottery after the big hit game than to know the game state after the big hit game, there is an advantage that the big hit game can be finished early, and it is probable. There is also the disadvantage that you do not know when to quit because you do not know whether it is in a normal state or a normal state. On the other hand, if you want to know whether the game state after the big hit game is in the probabilistic state or the normal state, there is a disadvantage that the lottery after the big hit game ends is delayed, and there is also an advantage that you can quit when you want to quit. That is, the player can decide the points that he / she attaches importance to and select the profit to be obtained in the jackpot game (whether to take an early lottery or to grasp the game state after the jackpot game).

In the sixth operation pattern of the sixth embodiment, the case where the movable effect member 6360 is operated according to the number of game balls that have passed through the specific winning opening 65a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by using a mechanism for distributing a predetermined number of game balls to another path, the predetermined number of game balls may be flown to a path acting on the movable effect member 6360, and the movable effect member 6360 may be operated by the action of the game balls. good.

In the tenth operation pattern of the sixth embodiment, the operation pattern in the jackpot game has been described, but the operation pattern is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be adopted as an operation pattern in a small hit game. In this case, it can be adopted as a V winning attacker in a so-called "1 type 2 type mixer".

In the sixth operation pattern of the sixth embodiment, the case where the movable effect member 6360 is changed to the upright state by detecting four game balls less than the specified number has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Not. For example, the movable effect member 6360 may be controlled to change to the upright state by detecting a game ball that is one less than the specified number. In this case, the last ball or the over winning ball may pass through the front side of the movable effect member 6360. Therefore, by visually recognizing the flow of the game ball entering the specific winning opening 65a through the route C2a, it is noticed that an over-winning (winning of a ball exceeding the planned number of winnings) has occurred. That is, if a plurality of balls pass through the front side of the movable effect member 6360, it means that an over prize has occurred.

Further, since the game ball that flows down the front side of the movable effect member 2360 in the upright state to the left and right and then flows back and forth near the center position in the left-right direction becomes the game ball related to the over-winning, the game that flows down the other route. Compared with a ball (a game ball that is not related to over winning), the staying time of the game ball on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a can be extended. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball related to the over-winning, and it is possible to improve the effect of the game ball related to the over-winning.

As a result, when an over-winning occurs, the player can be made to judge whether or not there is an over-winning by checking the flow mode of the game ball without notifying by voice or display. In other words, a special meaning can be added to the flow mode of the game ball. In this case, the attention to the flow mode of the game ball can be improved, the player can avoid playing the game in a distracted state, and the player can concentrate on the game.

In the sixth embodiment, the movable effect member 6360 has been described as not being a member for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the movable effect member 6360 may be configured as a member that opens and closes the specific winning opening 65a. In this case, by configuring the third sensor S3 as a large winning opening for paying out the prize ball and the sensor S as an out opening, the movable effect member 6360 can be configured as a member for opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a.

In this case, the moving upper lid member 332 can be configured in the same manner as in the present embodiment, or for example, the configuration may be omitted, or the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 may be omitted from the left and right ends of the moving upper lid member 332 in the left-right outward direction. A sideways sensor that is opened sideways is arranged so that a game ball that rolls along the line can enter, and when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the overhanging state, the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 is rolled to move the left and right ends. It may be configured so that the surpassed game ball can enter the sideways sensor. When the latter configuration is adopted, since the overhanging state is the open state of the moving upper lid member 332, it is preferable to reverse the operating direction of the solenoid 2333 by excitation (driving).

In the sixth embodiment, it has been described that the drive motor 510 is driven in accordance with the operation timing of the moving upper lid member 332, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board surface lower unit 6300 includes the lower surface raising member 5440 of the fifth embodiment and is not the operation timing of the moving upper lid member 332 (for example, when the gaming state is not shifted to the big hit game or the small hit game). When the symbol for a specific effect is stopped), the lower surface raising member 5440 is driven by a predetermined drive device so as to be arranged at the overhanging position, and in the same operation mode as any of the above-mentioned operation patterns. , The effect operation of driving the drive motor 510 may be performed.

In this case, while the moving upper lid member 332 maintains the closed state, the movable effect member 6360 operates in the same operation mode as in the big hit game or the small hit game, so that the player feels as if the big hit game or the small hit game. Can be directed to start. On the other hand, at this time, since the moving upper lid member 332 is maintained in the closed state (overhanging state), a useless prize ball is generated as compared with the case where the moving upper lid member 332 is actually operated in a short opening manner. Can be prevented.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned production operation is performed from the time when the big hit game is decided to be performed immediately before the big hit game is started, or after it is decided that the small hit game is started. It may be done just before the start of, or when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. In this case, by paying attention to the movable effect member 6360, it is possible to easily predict the timing at which the big hit game or the small hit game is started. In addition, by associating each movement of the movable effect member 6360 with a small hit game or a big hit game, the player with higher experience points can win a big hit from the operation mode of the movable effect member 6360. It is possible to make it easy to accurately determine whether the game is a game or a small hit game. As a result, it is possible to add a privilege for playing the game a plurality of times, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Example of technical concept in which the driven means enhances the distinctiveness of the opening / closing plate>
A launching device that launches a game ball toward the game area, a passing means configured to allow the game ball to pass, an open position that allows the game ball to pass through the passing means, and the game ball cannot pass through the passing means. In a gaming machine including an opening / closing means that displaces between the closing positions and a driving means that drives the opening / closing means, the gaming machine includes a driven means that is driven in response to the displacement of the opening / closing means, and is driven by the opening / closing means. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the means is configured so that the state change can be easily identified as compared with the opening / closing means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the opening and closing means for opening and closing the winning opening is composed of a plurality of opening and closing plates, which complicates the production (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-220731). .. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the plurality of opening / closing plates are arranged with the intention of making it difficult to tell whether the winning opening is in the closed state or the open state, a plurality of opening / closing plates are provided. There is a problem that it is difficult to improve the attention of the player even if it is produced as a sheet.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the driven means is configured to easily identify the state change as compared with the opening / closing means, it is difficult to understand the position of the opening / closing means from the player's point of view from the operation mode of the opening / closing means. Even in this case, the game can be easily performed by using the state of the driven means as a guide.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the case where the state change can be easily identified. For example, it may be easy to identify by configuring the shape to change with respect to the one whose shape does not change from the player's point of view even if the position changes, or by making the shape larger with respect to the smaller one. It may be easy.

In the gaming machine A1, the driven means is capable of transmitting the driving force through a transmission path different from the transmission path in which the driving force is transmitted to the opening / closing means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the opening and closing means for opening and closing the winning opening is composed of a plurality of opening and closing plates, which complicates the production (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-220731). .. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the driving force is transmitted to the opening / closing plate by a transmission path that overlaps with the transmission path that transmits the driving force to the opening / closing plate for production, one of the opening / closing plates is used. The load given from the game ball or the like is transmitted to the other opening / closing plate, and there is a risk that the durability of both opening / closing plates will be lower than when both opening / closing plates are separated. There was a problem.

Further, in this case, since it is necessary to dispose a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force from the middle position of the transmission path for transmitting the driving force to one opening / closing plate toward the other opening / closing plate, it is necessary to dispose the transmission mechanism of both opening / closing plates. There is a problem that the degree of freedom of arrangement and the degree of freedom of operation mode are low.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, a transmission path in which the driving force is transmitted to the opening / closing means and a transmission path in which the driving force is transmitted to the driven means are separately configured. Since it is possible, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the opening / closing means from being transmitted to the driven means.

In addition, since it is not necessary to connect the transmission path in which the driving force is transmitted to the opening / closing means and the transmission path in which the driving force is transmitted to the driven means in the middle, the opening / closing means and the driven means can be freely arranged. The degree of freedom and the degree of freedom of the operation mode can be improved.

In addition, "driven correspondingly" to the displacement of the opening / closing means means that the opening / closing means and the driven means are operating in a related manner, and the opening / closing means is necessarily in the open position or the closed position. It does not require that the state of the driven means be the same every time correspondingly.

For example, even if the driven means is in the first state when the opening / closing means is in the open position and then the driven means is in the second state when the opening / closing means is in the open position. After that, if the driven means is periodically set to the first state, it is recognized that the driven means is "correspondingly driven".

In the gaming machines A1 or A2, the driven means is arranged on the downstream side of the opening / closing means, and is driven before the opening / closing means starts displacement from the closed position to the open position. Game machine A3.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, it is possible to predict the timing at which the opening / closing means is in the open position before the opening / closing means is in the open position. Therefore, it is possible to easily measure the timing of launching the game ball aiming at the passing means.

When the opening / closing means starts to be displaced from the closed position to the open position, the driven means may be driven before a predetermined opening deviation period with respect to the start of displacement of the opening / closing means. .. In this case, by confirming the drive timing of the driven means, it is possible to grasp the timing before the predetermined opening deviation period when the opening / closing means actually starts displacement, so that it is easy to determine the displacement start timing of the opening / closing means. be able to.

Further, when the opening / closing means starts to be displaced from the opening position to the closing position, the driven means may be driven after a predetermined closing shift period after the displacement start of the opening / closing means. In this case, by confirming that the driven means has started to operate, it is possible to know that the opening / closing means has started to be displaced to the closed position. As a result, even when the position of the opening / closing means is difficult to see, the player can stop launching the game ball and suppress the ball loss.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the driven means is stopped while the opening / closing means is arranged in the open position.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, a configuration is adopted in which a gaming ball flowing down through the passing means can collide with the driven means when the opening / closing means is in the open position. In this case, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from colliding with the driven means while the driven means is being driven. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the driven means will be damaged due to the collision of the driven means with the game ball.

In this case, it is possible to relate whether or not the game ball can pass through the passing means by the displacement of the opening / closing means and the stop of the driven means. Therefore, even in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the opening / closing means, it is possible to assume an appropriate launch timing of the game ball by checking the state of the driven means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the driven means is configured to be driveable by the driving force of the driving means.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the number of drive means arranged can be reduced.

The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the mode of operation of the driven means with respect to the displacement of the opening / closing means can be changed based on the difference in the displacement mode of the opening / closing means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, a single driving means can be used to configure a plurality of variations of interlocking between the opening / closing means and the driven means.

As the difference in the displacement mode, various modes are exemplified. For example, the number of times the opening / closing means is displaced may be used, or the distance at which the opening / closing means is displaced may be different.

In the gaming machine A6, the difference in the displacement mode of the opening / closing means is configured as the number of displacements of the opening / closing means, and the mode of operation of the driven means with respect to the opening / closing means changes periodically based on the number of displacements. The gaming machine A7 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, the mode of operation of the driven means with respect to the opening / closing means can be configured as a set operation for the opening / closing means being displaced a plurality of times.

The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7 is provided with a second driving means for generating a driving force for driving the driven means separately from the driving means.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the driven means can be driven in an operation mode including an operation mode that does not depend on the movement of the opening / closing means driven by the driving means. can.

The driven means may be driven by the driving force of the driving means and the second driving means, or may be driven only by the driving force of the second driving means.

In the gaming machine A8, the direction of the driving force transmitted from the second driving means to the driven means is a direction along the direction of the driving force transmitted from the driving means to the driven means. Characteristic gaming machine A9.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A8, it is possible to prevent the driving means and the second driving means from being damaged by each other's driving force.

<Change the ball flow inside the attacker over time>
A launching device that launches a game ball toward the game area, a passing means configured to allow the game ball to pass, an open position that allows the game ball to pass through the passing means, and the game ball cannot pass through the passing means. In a gaming machine including an opening / closing means that displaces between the closed positions and a driving means that drives the opening / closing means, a detecting means configured to be able to detect a game ball that has passed through the passing means, and the passing A game ball that has passed through the means is configured to be able to flow down, is connected to the detection means, and the passed game ball is configured to be able to act on a flow path that is detected by the detection means and a game ball in the flow path. The gaming machine B1 is provided with a limiting means for limiting the period during which the gaming ball can pass through the flow path.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that change the winning efficiency of winning openings by changing the opening / closing width of the opening / closing means for opening and closing the winning openings (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-220731). .. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, while the winning efficiency at the timing of passing through the opening / closing means can be changed, the winning efficiency after passing through the opening / closing means cannot be changed. In this case, there is a problem that the winning efficiency cannot be changed in a state kept secret from the player, and the degree of freedom of production may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the limiting means for limiting the period during which the game ball can pass through the flow path is arranged in the flow path, the detection means without changing the ball entry efficiency into the passing means. It is possible to change the efficiency of entering a ball (winning). Therefore, it is possible to cause a change in the winning efficiency while keeping the change in the winning efficiency secret from the player.

Various aspects are exemplified as the passing means. For example, it may be a specific winning opening that opens and closes in a big hit game, or a second winning opening that opens and closes frequently in a short time state.

Various aspects are exemplified as the detection means. For example, it may be a winning sensor with payout, a passage detection sensor that detects the passage of a game ball without payout, a V winning sensor that generates a big hit game by passing the game ball, or after the big hit game is completed. It may be a sensor (V probability change sensor) related to the game state of (shift to the probability change state).

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as a period. For example, it may be a period determined based on the number of game balls that have passed through the passing means, or may be a period determined based on the time elapsed since the opening / closing means is in the open position.

Various aspects are exemplified as the winning efficiency. For example, it may mean the degree of the period from when the game ball passes through the passing means until it is detected by the detecting means, or the number of balls detected by the detecting means among the game balls that have passed through the passing means. May mean.

In the gaming machine B1, the limiting means is characterized in that the flow path width of the flow path is changed.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the period required for the gaming ball to pass through the flow path can be changed. Thereby, the flow mode of the game ball downstream of the passing means can be changed.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the limiting means is configured to be driveable by the driving force of the driving means, and the driving start time of the opening / closing means is different from the driving start time of the limiting means. Machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is possible to visually recognize that the opening / closing means and the limiting means are operating separately while reducing the number of the driving means arranged. .. As a result, it is possible to reduce the product cost of the gaming machine and improve the effect of the effect.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the limiting means is integrally formed with the opening / closing means, and the opening / closing means starts to be displaced to the closed position before the game ball reaches a predetermined position, whereby the flow down means. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the flow direction of the gaming ball on the route is changed to limit the period during which the gaming ball can pass through the flowing route.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the attention to the gaming ball can be maintained even after the gaming ball has passed through the passing means.

The mode of the flow path is not limited in any way. For example, a flow path having a cross-sectional area that allows the game ball to pass through may be configured in a mesh pattern, or may be configured as a flow path that is wide enough that the game ball can flow down in a random path.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the limiting means is characterized in that the passing period required for the gaming ball to pass through the flow path is changed.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the player indicates that the function of the limiting means is working as compared with the case where the gaming ball flows down by a completely different route. Can be difficult to recognize.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the limiting means includes a contact portion capable of contacting a game ball flowing down toward the passing means downstream of the opening / closing means, and the contacting portion thereof and the gaming ball. The gaming machine B6, wherein the displacement after the contact is set in a direction away from the passing means.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball in contact with the abutting portion of the limiting means from being pushed back to the passing means side. The flow can be smoothed.

<A tilt plate is placed downstream of the slide plate>
A launching device that launches a game ball toward the game area, a passing means configured to allow the game ball to pass, an open position that allows the game ball to pass through the passing means, and the game ball cannot pass through the passing means. The opening / closing means that is displaced between the closed positions and the opening / closing means that are located on the upstream side of the passing means and below the opening / closing means are arranged so that the first position and the second position can be displaced. The opening / closing means is provided with a displacement means capable of switching the flow path of the game ball by displacing the first position and the second position, and the opening / closing means is linearly displaced along a predetermined plane and the predetermined position is provided. The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the upper surface side of the plane is configured as the flow lower surface of the game ball, and the displacement means is rotationally displaced in response to the displacement of the opening / closing means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that open and close the specific winning opening by the displacement of the first opening / closing plate that is displaced linearly and the second opening / closing plate that is rotationally displaced (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-220731). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the first opening / closing plate is configured not to hold the game ball, and when the first opening / closing plate is arranged in the open position (position protruding to the front side), the game ball is first. Even if the pachinko ball reaches the opening / closing plate, the gaming ball passes up and down through the first opening / closing plate. There is a problem that the difference with (whether or not) becomes large and the dissatisfaction of the player may increase.

Further, since the second opening / closing plate is arranged at a position where the line of sight is blocked by the first opening / closing plate when viewed from the player, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp the state of the second opening / closing plate.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the opening / closing means is configured to include the flow surface of the gaming ball, the gaming ball that has reached the opening / closing means can be stopped. Therefore, the game ball that has reached the opening / closing means can be easily directed downstream.

Further, by configuring the displacement means to be displaced by a rotational motion corresponding to the displacement of the opening / closing means at a position below the opening / closing means, it is possible to easily recognize that the opening / closing means has been displaced from the player's point of view. ..

The driving force that displaces the opening / closing means and the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be displaced by a load given from a game ball, may be driven by an individual drive device, may be driven by a dual-purpose drive device, or may be driven by an individual drive device. It may be configured so that the period of being driven by the dual-purpose drive device can be switched.

In the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the flow path after the gaming ball has passed through the passing means can be changed by the difference in the length of the opening / closing means being maintained in the open position. ..

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the flow path of the game ball can be changed depending on the operating mode of the opening / closing means. The flow path of the game ball can be changed by the combination of. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the flow path of the game ball, so that the player can maintain his / her attention to the opening / closing means and the displacement means.

The gaming machine C1 or C2 is configured such that the flow-down mode of the gaming ball changes depending on the displacement mode of the opening / closing means at the time when the gaming ball reaches the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, even after the gaming ball passes the opening / closing means toward the passing means side, the attention to the gaming ball can be maintained high.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, when the displacement means is displaced to the second position while the game ball is on the upper surface of the displacement means at the first position, the displacement means is placed on the upper surface of the displacement means. The game machine C4 is configured so that the game ball on which it rides is flipped up and can collide with the ceiling surface.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, the flow mode of the game ball on the upper surface of the displacement means immediately before the displacement means is displaced to the second position is displayed at other timings. It can be made different from the game ball on the upper surface of the displacement means.

The aspect of the ceiling surface is not limited in any way. For example, the ceiling surface may be a wall surface whose position is always fixed, or may be configured as one surface of a member that can be displaced with the displacement of the opening / closing means.

In the gaming machine C4, the ceiling surface is displaced as the opening / closing means is displaced.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, it is possible to increase the variation of the reaction force given to the gaming ball when the opening / closing means and the gaming ball collide with each other.

In the gaming machines C1 or C2, the gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the path through which the gaming ball passes through the passing means can be changed by a difference in the position where the gaming ball collides with the opening / closing means or the displacement means. ..

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, it is possible to improve the attention to how the gaming ball reaches the opening / closing means or the displacement means.

The mode of collision with the opening / closing means or the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a collision when the game ball is flowing down, or it may be a collision after the game ball collides with a predetermined part and bounces off.

The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the distance between the displacement means and the inner surface of the passing means arranged to face the displacement means changes depending on the difference in the axial position of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, the ease of collision of the gaming ball that has collided with the displacement means and bounced off the ceiling surface is changed by the difference in the axial position of the displacement means. Can be done. This makes it possible to complicate the flow mode of the game ball.

The gaming machine C1 or C2 is characterized in that the path through which the gaming ball passes can be changed by the difference in the position through which the gaming ball passes when the opening / closing means is in the open position. C8.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, it is possible to increase the variation of the flow mode of the gaming ball that has passed through the opening / closing means, and it is possible to easily adopt the gaming ball as the directing means.

A gaming machine C9 in any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, wherein the displacement means is configured to be able to complete the displacement while the opening / closing means is in the closed position.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the arrangement of the gaming ball when the displacement means is displaced can be regulated, and the gaming ball becomes the displacement means at an unexpected timing. It is possible to prevent a collision or a game ball being bitten between the displacement means and the surrounding member.

A gaming machine Z1 in any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C9, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C9, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A gaming machine Z3 in any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C9, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
There is a gaming machine that changes the winning efficiency of the ball entrance by changing the opening / closing width of the opening / closing means for opening / closing the ball entry port (passing means) (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-220731). ..
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in producing a ball entering the ball entrance.
The technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be improved in terms of producing a ball entering the ball entrance.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is a launching device for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area, a passing means configured to allow the gaming ball to pass through, and the passing means through which the gaming ball passes. A gaming machine including an opening / closing means that displaces between an open position that allows passage and a closed position that prevents the game ball from passing through, and a driving means that drives the opening / closing means. A detection means configured to be able to detect a game ball that has passed through the passage means, and a game ball that has passed through the passage means are configured to be able to flow down, are connected to the detection means, and the passing game ball is detected by the detection means. It includes a flow path and a limiting means that is configured to act on the game ball in the flow path and limits the period during which the game ball can pass through the flow path.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and the limiting means changes the flow path width of the flow path.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the limiting means can be driven by the driving force of the driving means, and the driving start time of the opening / closing means and the above-mentioned It is different from the drive start time of the limiting means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, it can be improved in that the ball enters the passing means.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the flow mode of the game ball in the flow path can be changed by the limiting means.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, it can be further improved in that the ball enters the passing means.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
65a Specific winning opening (passing means)
112a Ball launch unit (launcher)
331b Down passage (part of the flow path)
2331e Extended floor (part of the flow path)
332,4332 Moving upper lid member (opening / closing means, part of limiting means, part of ceiling surface)
333, 2333 Solenoid (driving means)
2360, 3360, 4360, 6360 Movable effect member (driven means, part of limiting means, displacement means)
3331k Guide slope (part of the flow path)
3370 Sorting section (part of limiting means)
3374 2nd regulation part (contact part)
510 drive motor (second drive means)
6331m regulation plate (part of the flow path)
S sensor (part of detection means)
S2 2nd sensor (part of detection means)
S3 3rd sensor (part of detection means)
VC V winning sensor (part of detection means)

Claims (2)

A launching device that launches a game ball toward the game area, a passing means configured to allow the game ball to pass through, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass through the passing means, the game ball can pass through the passing means. In a gaming machine including an open / close displacement means that is displaced to bring the open state into an open state, and a drive means that drives the open / close displacement means.
A driven means that is driven in response to the displacement of the open / close displacement means is provided, and the driven means is configured so that the state change can be easily identified as compared with the open / close displacement means.
The driven means is configured to change the flow path of the game ball according to the state change .
The gaming machine, in case of from the closed state to the open state, and wherein said Rukoto configured such that the state change of the driving means is started after the displacement of the closing displacement means is started Gaming machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a board box.

Images